The
1997
Oldsrnobile
Achieva
Owner’s
Manual
1-1
2-1
3-
1
4-
1
5-
1
6-
1
7-1
8-
1
9-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells
you
how to use your seats and safety belts properly.
It
also explains the
“SRS”
system.
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your Oldsmobile.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do
if
you have
a
problem while driving, such
as
a
flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your Oldsmobile running properly and looking good.
Maintenance Schedule
This
section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells
you
how to contact Oldsmobile for assistance and how
to
get service and owner publications.
It
also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects’’ on page
8-8.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You
can use
it
to
quickly find
something you want to read.
i
GENERAL
MOTORS, GM,
the
GM Emblem,
OLDSMOBILE, the OLDSMOBILE Rocket Emblem
and the name ACHIEVA are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
in
the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Oldsmobile
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your Oldsmobile,
so
it
will
be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If
you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual
in
it
so
the
new owner can use it.
pJ
CERTIFIED
WE
SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION
THROUGH
National
Institute
for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
We
support voluntary
technician certification.
For Canadian Owners
Who
Prefer
a
French Language Manual:
Aux
propriktaires canadiens:
Vous
pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chez
votre concessionaire
ou
au:
DGN
Marketing Services Ltd.
1500
Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario
L5T
IC7
Litho
in
U.S.A. @Copyright General Motors Corporation
1996
Part
No.
22652547
B First Edition All Rights Reserved
ii
How
to
Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle.
If
you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together
to
explain
things quickly.
Index
A
good place
to
look for what you need is the Index
in
back
of
the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find
it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number
of
safety cautions in this book.
We use a
box
and the word
CAUTION
to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
I
These mean there
is
something that could hurt
you
or
other people.
In-the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid
or
reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with
a
slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle
Damage
Warnings
Also in this
book
you
will find these notices:
I
NOTICE:
These mean there
is
something that could
damage
your
vehicle.
In
the notice area, we tell you about something
that
can
damage your vehicle.
Many
times, this damage
would
not
be covered
by
your
warranty,
and
it could
be
costly.
But the notice will
tell
you
what to
do
to help avoid
the damage.
When
you
read other manuals,
you
might see
CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings
in
different colors or
in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle
Symbols
These
are
some
of
the
symbols
you
may
find
on
your
vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used
on
an
original battery:
POSSIBLE
A
CAUTION
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS
OR
FLAMES
SPARK
OR
,\I/,
COULD
FLAME
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for
you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle
is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
4
BELTS
n
POWER
WINDOW
'tl
These symbols
have
to
do
wilh
your
lamps:
SIGNALS
e
e
TURN
RUNNING
.'****o
DAYTIME
LAMPS
'**
FOG LAMPS
$0
These symbols
are
on
some
of
your
controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These
symbols
are
used
on
warning
and
indicator
lights:
COOLANT
-
TEMP
-
CHARGING
I-1
BAlTERY
SYSTEM
BRAKE
(@)
ENGINE OIL
w,
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
(@)
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you
may see:
FUSE
-%-
LIGHTER
n
HORN
)tr
SPEAKER
b
FUEL
e3
b
NOTES
vi
Section
1
Seats and
Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Oldsmobile and how to use your safety belts properly. You can
also learn about
some
things you should
not
do with air
bags
and
safety belts.
1-2
1-7
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-20
1-21
1-21
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People
Ask
About
Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
1-27
1-32
1-34
1-36
1-44
1-47
1-47
1-47
Rear Seat Passengers
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
-_
~
Seats
and
Seat
Controls
This
section tells
you
about the
seats
--
how
to
adjust them, and
also
about reclining seatbacks
and
head restraints.
Manual
Seats
I
A
CAUTION:
You can lose control
of
the vehicle if
you
try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you,
or
make
you
push
a
pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Move the lever under the front seat to unlock it. Slide
the seat to where you want
it.
Then
release the lever and
try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the
seat
is
locked in place.
4-Way
Manual
Seat
Manual
Lumbar
Support
(If
Equipped)
I
There are two levers at the front of the seat. The left
lever
(A)
adjusts the seat forward and back. The right
lever
(B)
adjusts the angle of the front of the seat.
Turn the knob on the right of the driver’s seat cushion
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust support
for
the
lower back.
The lever near the outer side of the seat
(A)
unlocks the
seat allowing
it
to slide forward and back. Then release
the lever and try to move the seat to be certain that it is
locked
in
place.
The lever
on
the right
(B)
allows you to tilt the seat up
and down.
1-3
Power Seat (If
Equipped)
Rear
Control
(C):
Raise the rear of the seat
by
holding
the switch
up.
Lower the rear of
the
seat
by
holding the
switch down,
Reclining
Front
Seatbacks
To
adjust the power seat:
Front Control
(A):
Raise the front
of
the seat
by
holding the switch up. Lower
the
front of the seat by
holding the switch down.
Center Control
(B):
Move the seat forward or back by
holding the control to the front or back.
Move
the
seat higher
by
holding
the
control up. Lower
the seat by holding
the
control down.
To
adjust
the
seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of
the seat and move the seatback where
you
want
it.
Release the lever to lock the seatback.
Pull up on the lever and the seat will go
to
an
upright position.
1-4
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
A
CAUTION:
I
Sitting
in
a
reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if
you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t
do
their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you.
In
a crash you could
go
into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In
a
crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down
so
that the top
of
the
restraint
is
closest to the top
of
your ears.
This
position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Seatback
Latches
(2-Door
Models)
The front seatback folds forward to let people get into
the back seat.
To
fold a front seat forward,
lift
the seatback latch.
When you return the seatback to its original position, the
seatback
will
lock.
Easv
Ent
Seat
(2-Door
Models)
A
CAC
JON:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In
a
sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
it, be sure
to
push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it
is
locked.
The
right front seat
of
your vehicle makes it easy to get
in and out of the rear seat.
Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
Move the right front seatback to its original position
after someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move
the seat rearward
until
it
locks.
Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get
out.
1-6
Rear
Seats
Folding the Rear Seat
(If
Equipped)
To fold down the rear seat, pull forward
on
the seat tab.
Push
the seatback up to return
it
to its original position.
To make sure the seatback is secure, push it into a
Mly
upright position.
A
loose seatback can cause an injury in
a sudden stop.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part
of
the manual tells you
how
to
use safety belts
properly.
It
also tells
you
some
things you should not do
with
safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS),
or air
bag
system.
Don’t let anyone ride where he
or
she can’t wear
a
safety belt properly. If you
are
in
a
crash and
you’re not wearing
a
safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse.
You
can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from
it.
You
can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you
are
buckled
up.
Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-7
It is extremely dangerous to ride in
a
cargo area,
inside or outside of
a
vehicle.
In
a
collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do
not allow people to
ride in any area
of
your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in
a
seat and using
a
safety belt properly.
I
Your
vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light”
in the Index.)
In
most states and Canadian provinces,
the
law
says
to
wear safety belts.
Here’s
why:
They
work.
You never know
if
you’ll
be
in a crash. If
you
do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are
in
between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than
25
years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter
...
a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you
ride
in
or on
anything, you
go
as
fast
as
it goes.
~~ ~ ~~~
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it's
just
a
seat
on
wheels.
Put
someone
on
it.
1-9
r
Get
it
up to speed. Then
stop
the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped
by
something.
In
a
real vehicle, it could be the windshield
...
1-10
I
or the instrument panel
...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such
good
sense.
1-11
Here Are Questions
Many
People Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and
the Answers
Q:
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing
a
safety belt?
A:
You
could
be
--
whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get out, is
much
greater
if
you are belted.
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags
are
in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only;
so
they work
with
safety belts
--
not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use
of
safety belts. Even
if
you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags,
you
still have to buckle up
to
get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
@
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
A:
You
may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
home, why should I wear safety belts?
accident
--
even one that isn’t your fault
--
you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25
miles
(40
km)
of
home. And the greatest number
of
serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40
mph
(65
hh).
Safety belts are
for
everyone.
How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This
part is only for people
of
adult size.
Be
aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there
are
different rules
for
smaller children and babies.
If
a child will be riding in
your Oldsmobile, see the
part
of
this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules
for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1.
Close and lock the door.
2.
Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so
you can sit up straight.
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
4.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Don’t let
it
get twisted.
1-13
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until
you
can buckle
the belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is
secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned
so
you
would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if
you
ever had to.
5.
To
make the lap part tight, pull down
on
the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-14
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In
a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.
If
you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should
go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks
if
there’s a sudden stop or crash.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster (4-Door Models)
Before
you
begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that
is
right for you.
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the adjuster to the desired position. You can move the
adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try
to move
it
down without squeezing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-15
Adjust the height
so
that
the
shoulder
portion
of
the belt is
centered
on
your shoulder. The
belt.
should
be
away
from
your
face
and
neck,
but not falling
off
your
shoulder.
@
What's wrong with this?
'A
1'
A:
The shoulder belt
is
too loose.
It
won't
give
nearly
as
much
protection this way.
You
can be seriously hurt
if
your shoulder
belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should
fit
against your body.
I
1-16
e.'
What's wrong with this?
I
'
A
CAUTION:
I
You
can be seriously injured
if
your
belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.
In
a
crash,
the belt would
go
up
over
your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
at
the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
1-17
What's wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt
is
worn
under the
arm.
It
should
be worn
over
the shoulder at
all
times.
1-18
.1\
CAUTION:
'
You
can be seriously injured
if
you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In
a
crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance
of
head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren't
as
strong
as
shoulder bones.
You
could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
What’s wrong with this?
T
L
I
I
1
I
I
A:
The
belt
is
twisted
across
the body.
A
CAUT3N:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt
to
spread impact forces. If
a
belt is twisted,
make it straight
so
it can work properly, or ask
your retailer to fix it.
To
unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt
is
out of the
way. If you slam the door on it,
you
can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
Safety
Belt
Use
During Pregnancy
Safety
belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they
are
more likely to be
seriously injured if thev don’t wear safety belts.
A
pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When
a
safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as
for
anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front
Passenger
Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,”
earlier in this section.
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
This
part
explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
or air bag system.
Your Oldsmobile has two air bags
--
one air bag for the
driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to
know
about the
air bag system:
You
can be severely injured or kill-- in
a
crash
if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt
--
even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during
a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints’’ to the safety
belts.
All
air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at
all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone
in
your vehicle should wear
a
safety belt properly
--
whether or not there’s an
air bag for that person.
r
-
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye.
If
you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position before
and
during
a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
air
bags. The driver should sit
as
far
back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
/d
CAUTION:
An
inflating air bag can seriously injure small
children.
Always
secure children properly
in
your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children” and the caution label on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light
on
the instrument
panel,
which
shows
AIR
BAG.
The system checks the
air
bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air
Bag
Readiness Light”
in
the Index
for
more information.
How
the
Air
Bag
System
Works
The right front passenger’s air bag
is
in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s
air
bag
is
in
the middle
of
the steering wheel.
1-23
If
something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
attach or put anything between an occupant and
an
air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything
on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any air
bag covering.
When should an
air
bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate
in
a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about
9
to
16
mph
(14
to
26
kmh). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so
that
it
can
be somewhat above
or
below this range. If
your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as
a
parked car, the threshold
level
will be higher.
The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle
of
the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an
air
bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and
in
the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
1-24
How does an air bag restrain?
In
moderate to severe frontal
or
near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the
steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement
the
protection
provided by safety belts.
Air
bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you
in
many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then
only
in moderate to
severe frontal
or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates,
it
quickly deflates,
so
quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components
of
the air bag module
in
the
steering wheel hub for
the
driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will
be hot for a short time. The parts
of
the bag that come
into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to
touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does
it
stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust
in
the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with
a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it
is
safe to do
so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A
new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your
vehicle is equipped with
a
crash sensing
and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the
air
bag system. The module records mformation
about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are
activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
system. Improper service can mean that your
air
bag
system won’t work properly. See your retailer for service.
0
Let
only
qualified technicians work on your
air
bag
NOTICE:
If
you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s
air
bag.
Do
not open or
break the air bag coverings.
Servicing
Your
Air Bag-Equipped
Oldsmobile
Air bags affect how your Oldsmobile should be
serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several
places around your vehicle.
You
don’t want the system
to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your Oldsmobile retailer and the Achieva Service
Manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag system.
To
purchase a service manual,
see “Service and Owner Publications” in
the
Index.
For up to
10
minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part
of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified
to
do
so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Rear
Seat
Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in
the rear
seat are hurt more often
in
crashes than those who
are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
2.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-27
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
hll
up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt
is
not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned
so
you
would be able
to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
3.
To
make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-28
.A
The lap part
of
the belt should be worn low and snug
on
the
hips,
just touching the thighs.
In
a
crash, this
applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely
to
slide under the lap belt.
If
you
slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This
could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should
go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts
of
the
body
are best able
to
take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt
locks
if there’s
a
sudden stop or a crash.
,A
CAU1
You
can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In
a
crash,
you
would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should
fit
against your body.
1-29
To
unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed
on
a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
There
is
one guide
for
each
outside passenger
position
in
the
rear
seat.
To
provide
added
safety belt
comfort
for
children
who
have
outgrown
child
restraints
and
for
smaller adults,
the
comfort
guides may be installed
on
the shoulder belts. Here's how to install a
comfort
guide
and
use the
safety
belt:
1.
Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge
of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-30
2.
Slide the guide under and past
the
belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges
of
the belt
into
the slots
of
the guide.
3.
Be sure that the belt is
not
twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
1-31
4.
Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described
in
“Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier
in
this section.
Make
sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To
remove
and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together
so
that you can take them out
from
the
guides.
Pull
the guide upward
to
expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate
the
guide and clip inward and in between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of
elastic
cord exposed.
Center Passenger Position
u
1-32
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center seating position, you have
a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To
make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the
belt.
To
make the belt shorter, pull its -free end as shown until
the belt
is
snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way
as
the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
If
the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-33
Children
Everyone in
a
vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants
and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law
in
every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children
up
to
some age must be
restrained while in
a
vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
A
CAUTION:
-
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in
a
child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether
it is the right type and size for your child.
CAUTION: (Continued)
I
A very young child’s hip bones are
so
small that
a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips,
as
it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In
a
crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
So,
be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in
a
child or infant restraint.
1-34
Never hold
a
baby in your arms while riding in
a
vehicle.
A
baby doesn't weigh much
--
until
a
crash. During
a
crash
a
baby will become
so
CAUTION: (Continued)
heavy you can't hold
it.
For
example, in
a
crash
at
only
25
mph
(40
km/h),
a
12-lb.
(5.5
kg)
baby
will
suddenly become
a
240-lb.
(110
kg)
force on
your
arms.
The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
1-35
Child
Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in
a
vehicle.
If
it
is,
it will have a label saying that
it
meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has
to
be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
Where
to
Put
the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are
safer
if they
are restrained
in
the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat.
Never
put
a
rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
A
child in
a
rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This
is
because the back of
a
rear-facing child restraint
would
be very close to
the inflating
air
bag. Always secure
a
rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You
may, however, secure
a
forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Before
you
secure
a
forward-facing child restraint, always move the
front passenger seat
as
far back
as
it will go.
Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear seat.
Wherever you install
it,
be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that
an
unsecured child restraint can move
around in
a
collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be SUI-e to properly secure any child
restraint
in
your vehicle
--
even when no child is in
it.
Top
Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap, your retailer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions designed for this vehicle. The retailer can
then install the anchor for you. In Canada, this work will
be done for you free
of
charge. Or, you may install
the
anchor hardware using the instructions provided
in the kt.
Securing
a
Child Restraint in
a
Rear
Outside Seat Position
If
your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored.
If
you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Oldsmobile retailer
to
put it in for you.
If
you
want to install an anchor yourself, your retailer can
tell you how to do
it.
Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top
strap, and that strap be anchored.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for
the child restraint.
2.
Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3.
Pick up the latch plate, and
run
the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If
the shoulder belt goes in front
of
the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able
to
unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if
you
ever had to.
1-38
5.
To
tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint.
6.
Push and pull the child restraint
in
different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To
remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt
and
let it go back all the
way.
The safety belt
will
move freely again
and
be ready to
work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
U
You’ll be using the lap belt.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1-39
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along
the
belt.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
Secure the child
in
the child restraint as the
instructions say.
Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
down on the child restraint.
6.
To
tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure
it
is secure.
If
it isn't, secure the
restraint
in
a different place in the vehicle and
contact
the
child restraint maker for their advice
about how
to
attach the child restraint properly.
1-40
To
remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never-
safety
belt.
It
will be ready to work for
an
adult or larger
put
a
rear-facing child restraint
in
this seat. Here’s why:
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
CAUTION:
:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This
is
because the back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1.
Because
your
vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats”
in
the Index.)
2.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3.
Secure the child in the child restraint
as
the
instructions say.
4.
Pick
up the latch plate, and
run
the lap
and
shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt
if
needed.
If
the shoulder belt goes
in
front of the child’s face or
neck, put
it
behind the child restraint.
5.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
6.
To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it
go
back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for
an
adult
or
larger child passenger.
you push down
on
the child restraint.
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-43
Larger
Children
If
you
have the choice,
a
cud should sit next to a
window
so
the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint
a
shoulder belt
can
provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained
in
the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in
a
crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have
outgrown
child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-44
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In
a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured.
A
belt must be used by
only one person at
a
time.
What if
a
child is wearing
a
lap-shoulder belt,
but the child
is
so
small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of
the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder,
so
that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child
is
sitting in
a
rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is
so
small that the shoulder belt
is
still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
r
Never
do this.
Here
a
child is sitting
in
a
seat that has
a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child.
If
the child wears the belt in this
way,
in
a
crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right
on
the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion
of
the belt
should be
worn
low
and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones
in
a
crash.
Safety
Belt
Extender
If
the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But
if
a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
retailer will .order
you
an extender. It’s free. When you
go in
to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so
the extender will be long enough for you.
The
extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle
that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.
To
wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking
Yo---
Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look
for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If
you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing
Restraint
System
Parts
After a Crash
If
you’ve had
a
crash, do you need new belts?
After
a
very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But
if
the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need
to
have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If
your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the special
part
of
the safety belt that goes through the seat to the
adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
~
1-47
b
NOTES
1-48
~
Section
2
Features and Controls
Here
you
can
learn
about the many standard and optional features on your Oldsmobile, and information
on
starting,
shifting and braking.
Also
explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell
you
if everything
is
working properly
--
and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-7
2-10
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-
16
2-19
2-2
1
2-25
2-28
2-29
2-3
1
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Lock Control (If Equipped)
Trunk
Theft
Passlock
TM
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Manual Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transaxle
Models Only)
Shifting Out
of
PARK (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
2-3
1
2-32
2-32
2-33
1
2-34
1,
2-35
2-35
2-43
2-46
2-49
2-50
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-60
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transaxle)
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn SignalMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Accessory Power Outlet
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
1-
A
CAUTION:
-
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A
child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows
or
other
controls
or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in
a
vehicle with young children.
2-2
One key
is
used for the
ignition, the doors
and
all
other locks.
When a new Oldsmobile is delivered, the retailer
removes the key tag from the keys, and gives them
to
the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your retailer or a
qualified locksmith how
to
make extra keys. Keep the
tags
in
a
safe place.
If
you lose your keys, you’ll be able
to
have new ones made easily using these tags.
If
you need
a
new key, go to your Oldsmobile retailer
for the correct key
code.
NOTICE:
Your Oldsmobile has
a
number of new features
that can help prevent theft, therefore you
can
have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if
you ever lock your keys inside. You may even
have to damage
your
vehicle to get in.
So
be sure
you have extra keys.
Door
Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers
--
especially children
--
can easily
open the doors and
fall
out. When
a
door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down
or
stop your vehicle.
This may not be
so
obvious:
You
increase the
chance of being thrown out
of
the vehicle in
a
crash
if
the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better
off
whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From
the
outside,
use
your door key or Remote
Lock
Control,
if
your vehicle has this option.
From
the inside,
to
lock the door, slide
the
locking
lever rearward.
To
unlock the door, slide the locking lever forward.
2-4
Power
Door
Locks
With power door locks, you
can lock or unlock all the
doors of your vehicle from
the driver or front passenger
door lock switch.
Automatic
Door
Locks
Just close your doors and turn on the ignition.
If
you
have an automatic transaxle, all
of
the doors will lock
when you move your shift lever out
of
PARK
(P)
or
NEUTRAL
(N).
If you have a manual transaxle,
all
of
the doors will lock when the vehicle reaches about
8
mph (13 km/h). If someone needs to get out while the
vehicle
is
running, have that person
use
the manual or
power lock. When the door is closed again, it will lock
automatically when you move your shift lever out
of
PARK
(P)
or
NEUTRAL
(N).
If
you
have a manual
transaxle, the doors will lock when the vehicle reaches
about
8
mph
(13
km/h). All doors will automatically
unlock when the key is turned to the
OFF
position.
If you don’t want the doors to automatically unlock
when
the
key is turned to the
OFF
position, you can
remove the
DR
UNLK
fuse.
For
fuse location, see
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
2-5
Rear
Door
Security
Locks
Your Oldsmobile is
equipped with rear door
security locks that help
prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors
of your vehicle
from
the inside.
To use one
of
these locks:
1.
Use a key to move
the
lock all the way up.
2.
Close the door.
3.
Do
the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors
of
your vehicle cannot be opened from
inside when this feature is in use.
If
you want to open
a
rear door when the security lock is on:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside.
2.
Then open the door from the outside.
If you don't cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride
in
the rear won't
be
able
to
open
the rear door from the inside.
You
should
let
adults and
older children know how these security locks work, and
how to cancel the locks.
To
cancel the rear door locks:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
2.
Use a key to move the lock all the way down.
3.
Do
the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Leaving
Your
Vehicle
If
you are leaving the vehicle, open your door and set
the locks from inside, then get out and close the door.
2-6
Remote
Lock
Control
(If
Equipped)
If your Oldsmobile has this option, you can lock and
unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about
3
feet
(1
m)
up to
30
feet
(9
m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
In addition, the system illuminates the interior lamps for
a set period
of
time. The Remote Lock Control system
consists
of
a receiver, which is located in the vehicle,
and two hand-held transmitters.
Your Remote Lock Control
operates on a radio
frequency subject to
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry
and Science Canada.
This
device complies with
Part
15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
this
device may not cause harmhl interference,
and
(2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with
RSS-210
of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1)
this device may not cause
interference, and
(2)
this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range about
3
feet
(1
m) up to
30
feet
(9
m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work,
try
this:
8
8
8
8
Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle.
You
may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right,
hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If you’re still having trouble, see your Oldsmobile
retailer or a qualified technician for service.
2-7
Operation
The
following functions are available with the Remote
Lock Control system:
LOCK: All doors will automatically lock when the
LOCK
button on the transmitter is pressed. The interior larnps
stay on for two seconds after all
of
the doors
are
closed.
UNLOCK: The driver’s door will unlock automatically
when
the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed.
If
the UNLOCK button is pressed again within five
seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will stay on for
40
seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
Trunk Release: The trunk will unlock anytime the
vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed and the
ignition is
OFF.
If
the ignition is on, the trunk will
unlock
if
the parking brake is set (manual transaxle) or
the
gear selector is in PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N)
(automatic transaxle). The interior lamps will come on
for
40
seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to
the
ON
position.
Matching Transmitter(s)
To
Your Vehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If
a
transmitter
is
lost or stolen,
a
replacement can be purchased through
your retailer. Remember
to
bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your retailer.
When the retailer matches the replacement transmitter to
your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once your retailer has coded the new
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
You can match your transmitter to as many 1997
General Motors vehicles as you own, as long as they
have the same Remote Lock Control system. Contact
your retailer
for
assistance with this.
2-8
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your key chain
transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the
normal
range in any location.
If
you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change
the
battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
To
replace the battery in the Remote Lock Control:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
Remove
the
battery and replace it with the
new
one.
Make sure
the
positive
(+)
side
of
the battery faces down.
Use one,
3
volt, CR2032,
or
equivalent, type battery.
Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is
on
tightly, so water won’t get in.
Check the operation
of
the
transmitter with your
vehicle.
If
the transmitter does not work,
try
synchronizing
the
transmitter with the receiver.
2-9
Synchronization
Your Remote
Lock
Control system is equipped with
a
security
system that prevents anyone
from
recording
and
playing back your
signal.
The transmitter does not send
the
same
signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not
respond to
a
signal that has been sent
to
it more than once.
To
resynchronize your transmitter and receiver, follow
these directions:
1. Stand close to your vehicle,
2.
Press and hold the
LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on
the transmitter at the same time,
3.
Hold the buttons for five seconds. In this time, the
doors
should
lock
and
unlock once. This confirms
the resynchronization. If the doors do not lock and
unlock, see your retailer for service.
Trunk
To
unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the door key
and turn the trunk lock cylinder.
A
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous
to
drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide
(CO)
gas can
come into your vehicle.
You
can’t see
or
smell
CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If
you must drive with the trunk lid open
or
if
electrical wiring
or
other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fan
on
your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on
VENT.
That will force outside air into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
instrument panel, open them all the way.
If
you
have
air
outlets
on
or under the
See “Engine Exhaust’’ in the Index.
2-10
Remote Trunk Release
Pull
up
on the remote release handle, located on the
floor
near the left side
of
the driver’s
seat,
to release the
trunk lid. Make sure the lockout feature is not activated.
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
Your remote trunk release may be equipped with
a
lockout feature to help prevent unauthorized entry into
the trunk when leaving the vehicle unattended. The
switch
is
located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted
to the trunk lid latch.
To
turn the lockout
on,
slide
the switch all the way to the
right.
To
turn the lockout
off,
slide the switch all the
way to the left.
When the lockout
is
on, the remote trunk release,
located in the vehicle, will not release the trunk lid.
However, the trunk lid can still be opened with the key.
If
you have the optional Remote Lock Control feature,
your vehicle is not equipped with the trunk lockout switch.
2-11
Theft
Parking
Lots
If
you
park in
a
lot where
someone
will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what
if
you have to leave your ignition key? What
if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put
your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk
or glove box.
Lock the glove box.
Vehicle theft is
big
business, especially in some cities.
Although your Oldsmobile has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key
in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves
--
so
don’t
do
it.
When you park your Oldsmobile and open the driver’s
door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your
key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do
this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so
will
your ignition. If you have an automatic transaxle, taking
your key out also locks your transaxle. And remember
to lock the doors.
Parking
at
Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take
the
door key with you.
Passlock
TM
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system
is armed once the key is removed from the ignition.
Passlock enables fuel
if
the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key.
If
a correct key is not used.
fuel is disabled.
2-12
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off
after the engine is started.
If
the engine stalls and the
SECURITY light flashes, wait until the light stops
flashing before trying to restart the engine. Remember to
release the key from the
START
position as soon
as
the
engine starts.
If
you are driving and the SECURITY
light comes on, you
will
be able to restart the engine
if
you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this
time. You may also want
to
check the fuse (see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your
Oldsmobile retailer for service.
If
the SECURITY light comes on while the engine is
running, a problem has been detected and the system
may need service. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance Program
at
1
-800-442-OLDS
(6537).
New Vehicle cCBreak-InSS
NOTICE:
Your modern Oldsmobile doesn’t need an
elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better
in the long run
if
you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive
at
any one speed
--
fast or
slow
--
for the first
500
miles
(805
km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
200
miles
(322
km) or
so.
During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
See “Towing
a
Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
0
Avoid making hard stops for the first
Don’t tow
a
trailer during break-in.
Ignition
Positions
c
I
1
D
B
i
A
i
E
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn
the switch to five positions.
ACCESSORY
(A):
This position lets you use things
like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is
off.
To
use ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it
toward
you.
Your steering wheel will stay locked.
LOCK
(B):
Before
you
put the key into the ignition
switch, the switch is in
LOCK.
It
is
also
the only
position
in
which
you
can remove
the
key. This locks
your steering wheel, ignition and transaxle (on
automatic transaxle models).
OFF
(C):
This position unlocks the steering wheel and
ignition, but does not send electrical power to any
accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must be
pushed or towed, but never try
to
push-start your
vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the
driver’s door when
the
ignition
is
off
and the key
is
in
the ignition.
RUN
(D):
This position is where the key returns after
you
start your engine and release the switch.
The
switch
stays in the RUN position when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
RUN to operate your electrical power accessories, and
to
display some instrument panel warning lights.
2-14
START
(E):
This position starts the engine. When
the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return
to
RUN
for normal driving.
Note
that even
if
the engine
is
not running, the positions
ACCESSORY
and
RUN
are
on
positions that allow you
to
operate
your
electrical accessories, such as the radio.
-
-1
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key to
LOCK
will lock the steering column and result
in
a
loss
of
ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause
a
collision.
If
you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only
to
OFF.
Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE:
If
your
key seems
stuck in
LOCK
and you can’t
turn
it,
be
sure
you
are
using the
correct
key;
if
so,
is
it
all
the
way
in?
If
it is, then
turn
the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using
a
tool
to
force it could break the key or the
ignition switch.
If
none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Key Release
Button
(Manual Transaxle)
Starting
Your
Engine
The
key cannot be removed from the ignition unless the
Automatic
Transaxle
key
release
button
is
used.
Move your shift lever to PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL (N),
Your engine won’t start in any other position
--
that’s
a
To
remove the key, turn the key
to
the
OFF
position.
While pressing the key release button in, turn
the
key to
the
LOCK
position. Pull the key straight out.
safety feature.
To
restart when you’re already moving,
~
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
~
I
NOTICE:
I
I
I
~
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Oldsmobile
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK
(P)
only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL (N). Hold
the clutch pedal
to
the
floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
down
--
that’s a safety feature.
Starting
Your
2.4
Liter
Engine
1,
Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let
go
of
the
key. The idle speed will go
down
as your
engine gets warm.
Holding your key in START for longer than
15
seconds
at
a
time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2.
If
it doesn’t start right away, and
if
the weather is
very cold (below
-20”
F
or
-29”
C),
push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter
of
the way down
while you turn the key to START.
Do
this until the
engine starts.
As
soon
as
it
does, let
go
of
the key.
3.
If
your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with
too
much gasoline.
Try
pushing
your
accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in
START for about three seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
If
the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time
keep the pedal about one-quarter
of
the way down
for five or
six
seconds.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your retailer.
If
you
don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If
you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Starting
Your
3100
Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator
pedal,
turn your
ignition key to
START.
When the engine starts, let
go
of
the key. The idle speed will go down
as
your
engine gets
warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15
seconds
at
a
time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2.
If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding
it
there as
you
hold the key in
START for
up
to
15
seconds.
This
clears the extra
gasoline
from
the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your retailer.
If
you don’t,
your engine might
not
perform properly.
If
you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual
that
tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2-18
Engine
Coolant
Heater
(If
Equipped)
2.4L
Engine
3100
Engine
In very cold weather,
0°F
(-
18
"C)
or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and
better
fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of
four hours prior
to
starting your vehicle.
To
Use the
Coolant
Heater
1.
Turn
off
the engine.
2.
Open the hood and
unwrap
the electrical cord.
3.
Plug it into
a
normal, grounded 110-volt
AC
outlet.
ION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.
Also,
the wrong
kind
of
extension cord could overheat and cause
a
fire.
You
could be seriously injured.
Plug
the
cord into
a
properly grounded three-prong
110-volt
AC
outlet.
If
the cord won’t reach, use
a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at
least
15
amps.
4.
Before starting the engine,
be
sure to unplug and store
the cord
as
it
was
before to keep it away from moving
engine parts.
If
you don’t, it
could
be
damaged.
How
long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged
in? The answer depends
on
the outside temperature, the
kind
of
oil
you have, and some other things. Instead
of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your Oldsmobile retailer in the area where
you’ll
be
parking your vehicle. The retailer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
2-20
Automatic Transaxle Operation
P
R
N
02
3
2
1
Your
automatic transaxle
has
a shift lever located
on
the console between
the seats.
PARK (P):
This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to
use
when
you
start your engine because
your
vehicle can’t move easily.
A
CAUTION:
It
is
dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the
shift lever is
not
fully in
PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly set.
Your
vehicle
can
roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless
you
have to.
If
you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into
PARK (P)”
in the Index.
If
you’re pulling
a
trailer, see “Towing
a
Trailer” in
the Index.
2-21
Ensure the shift lever is fully in
PARK
(P)
range before
starting the engine.
You
Oldsmobile
has a
brake-trmsaxle
shift interlock. You have to apply your regular brake
before you
can
shift from
PARK
(P)
when the ignition
key
is
in
the
RUN
position.
If
you cannot shift out of
PARK
(P),
ease pressure on the
shift
lever
--
push the shift
lever
all
the way into
PARK
(P)
--
as you maintain brake
application. Then move
the
shift
lever into the gear you
wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the
shift lever.) See
“Shifting
Out
of
PARK
(P)”
later
in
this section.
REVERSE (R):
Use
this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to
REVERSE (R)
while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to
REVERSE (R)
only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To
rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of
snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL
(N):
In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels.
To
restart when you’re
already
moving,
use
NEUTRAL
(N)
only. Also, use
NEUTRAL
(N)
when your vehicle
is
being towed.
r
Shifting out of
PARK (P)
or
NEUTRAL
(N)
while
your engine is “racing” (running
at
high speed)
is
dangerous. Unless
your
foot is
firmly
on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly.
You
could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of
PARK
(P)
or
NEUTRAL
(N)
while
your
engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by
shifting out
of
PARK
(P)
or
NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-22
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(0):
If
your automatic
transaxle has AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(a),
this
position is for normal driving.
If
you need more power
for passing, and you’re:
Going less than
35
mph
(56
km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about
35
mph
(56
km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all
the
way down. You’ll shift down to
the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
This NOTICE applies only if you have an
automatic overdrive transaxle.
If
your vehicle is
so
equipped and if it seems to start up rather
slowly, or
if
it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may
be
wrong with
a
transaxle
system sensor.
If
you drive very
far
that way,
your vehicle can be damaged.
So,
if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND
(2)
when you are driving
less than
35
mph
(56
km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE
(0)
for higher speeds.
THIRD
(3):
This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(@).
Here
are some times you might choose THIRD
(3)
instead
of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(@):
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When towing a trailer,
so
there is less shifting
between gears.
0
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND
(2):
This position gives
you
more power but
lower fuel economy.
You
can use SECOND
(2)
on hills.
It
can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes
off
and on.
2-23
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND
(2)
for more than
25
miles
(41
km), or
at
speeds over
55
mph
(88
km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(GO)
or
THIRD
(3)
as
much
as
possible. Don’t shift into
SECOND
(2)
unless you are going slower than
65
mph
(105
km/h)
or
you can damage
your engine.
If you have automatic overdrive,
SECOND
(2)
will select
either
first
or second
gear
depending on vehicle speed.
If
your vehicle
is
slowing, the transaxle will downshift to
first gear at
20
to
25
miles per hour
(32
to
40
h/h)
for
engine braking.
You
may notice some variation in shift
speed in
SECOND
(2)
when accelerating or braking.
FIRST
(1):
This
position
gives
you
even
more
power (but
lower
fuel
economy)
than
SECOND
(2).
You
can
use
it
on
very
steep hills,
or
in
deep snow
or
mud.
If
the selector
lever
is
put in
FIRST
(l),
the
transaxle won’t
shift
into
first gear until the vehicle is
going
slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen
if
you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against
a
solid object.
You
can
damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK
(P)
to hold your vehicle in position on
a
hill.
2-24
Manual Transaxle
Operation
1
I
3
5
2
4
R
This
is
your shift pattern.
Here’s how to operate your transaxle:
FIRST
(1):
Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST
(1).
Then, slowly
let
up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST
(1)
when you’re going less
than
20
mph
(32
km/h). If you’ve come
to
a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST
(1)’
put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL
(N)
and let up on the clutch. Press
the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST
(1).
2-25
SECOND
(2):
Press
the clutch pedal as
you
let
up
on
the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND
(2).
Then
slowly let up
on
the clutch pedal
as
you
press
the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4)
and
FIFTH
(5):
Shift into
THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4)
and
FIFTH
(5)
the same way
you do for
SECOND
(2).
Slowly let up
on
the clutch
pedal
as
you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up
on
the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and
the
brake pedal, and shift into
NEUTRAL
(N).
NEUTRAL (N):
Use this position when you start or
idle
your
engine.
REVERSE
(R):
To
back up, press down the clutch
pedal and
shift
into
REVERSE
(R).
Let
up
on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator
pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while
your
vehicle
is
moving could damage your transaxle.
Also, use
REVERSE
(R),
along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-26
Shift
Speeds
Up
Shift Light
A
CAUTION:
If
you
skip more than one gear when
you
downshift, you could lose control
of
your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don’t
shift from FIFTH
(5)
to SECOND
(2)
or from
FOURTH
(4)
to
FIRST
(1).
I
NOTICE:
If
you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if
you
race the engine when
you
downshift, you can damage the clutch or transaxle.
A
Your manual transaxle
Oldsmobile has an
up
shift
light. This light will show
you
when to shift
to
the
next highest gear for best
fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
highest gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you.
For
the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to
go
on
and
off
if
you
quickly change the position
of
the
accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.
Parking
Brake
To
set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot.
If
the ignition is on,
the brake system warning
ght will come on.
To
release the parking
brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down. Pull the
BRAKE RELEASE lever.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on
can cause
your rear brakes
to
overheat.
You
may have
to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts
of
your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in t.he Index. That section shows
what to
do
first
to
keep the trailer from moving.
2-28
Shifting
Into
PARK
(P)
(Automatic Transaxle
Models
Only)
A
CAUTION:
It
can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift
lever
is
not fully in
PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly
set.
Your vehicle can roll.
If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly.
You
or others could be
injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
If
you’re pulling
a
trailer, see
“Towing
a
Trailer” in the Index.
1.
Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2.
Move the shift lever into
PARK
(P)
position like
this:
0
Hold in the button on
the
lever.
0
Push
the lever all the way toward the front
of
your vehicle.
3.
Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4.
Remove the key and take
it
with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-29
Leaving
Your
Vehicle
With
the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle
Models Only)
L
It
can be dangerous
to
leave
your
vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever
is
not fully in
PARK
(P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if
you
leave the vehicle with the engine running,
it
could
overheat and even catch fire.
You
or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have
to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle
is
in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into
the
PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if
you can move the shift lever away from PARK
(P)
without first pushing the button.
If you
can,
it
means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK
(P).
Torque
Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If
you are parking on
a
hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into
PARK
(P)
properly, the weight
of
the
vehicle may put too much force
on
the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out
of
PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of
PARK (P)
before
you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill
to take
some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull
the
shift lever out of PARK
(P).
2-30
Shifting
Out
of
PARK
(P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
Your Oldsmobile
has
a brake-transaxle shift interlock.
You
have
to
apply your regular brake before you can
shift from PARK
(P)
when the ignition
is
in the
RUN
position. See “Automatic Transaxle”
in
the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK
(P),
ease pressure on
the shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into
PARK
(P)
--
as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the
shift lever button before moving the shift lever.)
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift lever out of PARK (P), try this:
1,
Remove the ignition key.
2.
There is a small cap
on
the passenger’s side
of
the center console. Gently remove it with a
small screwdriver.
3.
Insert the ignition key into this opening until it contacts
with
a
small paddle.
This
is
the override feature.
4.
While pushing forward on the paddle, press the shift
lever button, then pull the shift lever from PARK (P).
5.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon as
you
can.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual
transaxle in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
parking brake.
If
your vehicle is equipped
to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index.
2-31
Par1
mg
Over
Thin-3
That
Burn
rn
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves,
dry
grass or other things that
can burn.
1
Engine
Exhaust
2
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can
kill.
It contains the gas
carbon monoxide
(CO),
which you can’t
see
or
smell.
It
can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in
a
collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
If
you ever suspect exhaust
is
coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down
to
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
or different.
modified improperly.
blow
out any
CO;
and
2-32
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transaxle)
It’s better not
to
park with the engine running. But if you
wer have to,
here
are some things to know.
CA,
TIO,
4:
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in
a
closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide
(CO)
into your vehicle even if
the fan switch
is
at the highest setting. One place
this can happen
is
a
garage. Exhaust
--
with
CO
--
can come in easily. NEVER park in
a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be
a
blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
~~
-
~ ~~~ ~
~~~ ~ ~~~
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever
is
not fully
in
PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK
(P).
Follow the proper steps
to
be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into
PARK
(P)”
in
the Index.
If
you
are parking on
a
hill and if you’re pulling
a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
2-33
Windows
Auto-Down
Feature
The
driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature.
This switch is labeled
AUTO.
Tap the switch back, and
the driver’s window will open a small amount.
If
the
switch
is
moved all the
way
back,
the
window will
go
all
the way down.
Manual
Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
lwer
Windows
(If
Equipped)
Switches on the driver’s
armrest control each of the
windows when the ignition
is on. In addition, each
passenger door has a switch
for its own window.
To
stop the window while it is lowering, move the
switch forward.
To
raise the window, move and hold the
switch forward.
Lock-Out
Switch
On four-door models, the driver’s power window
controls also include a lock-out switch. Press
LOCK
to
stop front
and
rear passengers from using their window
switches.
The
driver can still control all the windows
with the lock
on.
Press
the other side of the
LOCK
button for normal window operation.
Horn
You
can sound the horn
by
pressing the horn symbol on
your steering wheel.
2-34
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A
tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever located on the left side of the steering column.
Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the lever to lock the wheel
in
place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
0
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-35
Turn
and
Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for
right)
and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow
you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To
signal a
turn,
move the lever all the way up or down.
When the
turn
is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An
arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the
turn
or
To
signal a lane change,
just
raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold
it
there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change,
if
the arrows flash
rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your
turn
signal.
If
a signal bulb is
burned out, replace
it
to help avoid an accident. (See
“Bulb Replacement”
in
the Index).
If
the arrows don’t go on at
all
when
you
signal
a
turn,
check
the fuse
(see
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers”
in
the Index) or
contact your Oldsmobile retailer service department).
Turn
Signal
On
Chime
A
warning chime signal will come on
if
you
have left
your turn signal on for more than
3/4
mile
(
1
km).
2-36
Headlamp High/Low Beam
To
change the headlamps
from low beam to high or
high to low, pull the turn
signal lever all
the
way
toward
you.
Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the instrument
panel also will be on.
The headlamp high/low beam indicator may flash if the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) system is experiencing
a problem or if a headlamp is malfunctioning.
Windshield Wipers
'ti.
You control the windshield wipers by moving the stalk
with the
wiper
symbol
on
it
up
or
down.
For a single wiper cycle, push
the
stalk down
to
MIST,
then
release
it.
For
more cycles, hold the stalk down longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, move the stalk up to
the
(1)
position. For high-speed wiping, move the stalk
up further, to
(2).
To
stop the wipers, move the
stalk
to
OFF.
You
can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow.
Move the stalk to
DELAY?
then rotate the inner band and
choose the delay you want. Rotate the inner band
up
for
shorter delay times between wiper cycles. Rotate the band
down for a longer delay time between wiper cycles.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If
they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your
blades do become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until
it
cools. Clear
away snow
or
ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
To
wash your windshield, pull the stalk toward you until
the washers begin.
2-38
I
I'ION:
It
Cruise Control
(If
Equipped)
In freezing
.
:eather, don't use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form
ice
on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
When you release the stalk, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will either stop or will resume the delay
speed
you
were using before.
With cruise control,
you
can maintain a speed
of
about
25
mph
(40
km/h)
or
more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work
at
speeds below
25
mph
(40
km/h).
When
you
apply your brake
or
the clutch
pedal,
the
cruise
control
shuts
off.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at
a
steady speed.
So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
slippery roads.
On
such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and
you
could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
Setting Vruise Contra]
If
you leave your cruise control switch
on
when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit
a
button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep
the cruise control switch
OFF
until you want to
use
it.
1.
Move
the cruise control switch to
ON.
2.
Get
up
to the speed you want.
3.
Press in the SET button at the end
of
the
lever and
release it.
4.
Take your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This,
of
course, shuts
off
the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it. Once you’re going about
25
mph
(40
km/h)
or more, you can move the cruise control switch from
ON
to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about half
a
second.
You’ll
go
right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If
you hold the switch at
R/A
longer than half a second,
the vehicle will keep going faster until
you
release the
switch or apply the brake or clutch pedal.
You
could be
startled and even
lose
control.
So
unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at
R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go
to
a
higher speed:
0
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from
ON
to
R/A.
Hold it
there until
you
get up
to
the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to
R/A
for
less than half a second and then release
it.
Each
time you
do
this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6
km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn
on
the cruise control by pushing the
SET
button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways
to
reduce
your
speed while
using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half
a
second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal
to
increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and
the
steepness
of
the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
2-42
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to
a lower gear
to keep your speed down.
Of
course, applying the brake
or clutch pedal takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Out
of
Cruise Control
There are two ways
to
turn
off
the cruise control:
0
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transaxle; OR
0
Move the cruise switch to
OFF.
Erasing the Cruise Speed Memory
When you
turn
off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior
Lamps
Rotate
the
turn signal lever middle ring up one position
to turn on:
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-43
Rotate the turn signal lever middle ring up two positions
to turn on:
Headlamps
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Rotate the switch to
OFF
to turn all of the lamps
off.
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the
ignition while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a
warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front
of
your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful
in
the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The
DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
The engine is running,
The headlamp switch is in the
OFF
position,
0
The light sensor detects daytime light,
0
The parking brake is released and
0
The shift lever is not in PARK
(P)
on an
automatic transaxle.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker,
park lamps and instrument panel lights will not be
illuminated.
The DRL and the ALC systems will remain off any time
your automatic transaxle vehicle is
in
PARK
(P)
and the
parking brake
is
engaged.
The DRL and the ALC systems will remain off any time
your manual transaxle vehicle is in NEUTRAL
(N)
and
the parking brake is engaged.
2-44
Automatic Light Control (ALC)
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic light sensor
on top
of
the instrument panel under the defroster grill,
so
be sure it
is
not
covered which will cause the
nighttime lights to be
on
continuously.
When it is dark enough outside, your ALC will turn
on
your low-beam headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, park lamps and instrument panel lights.
There is a 20-second delay in the transition between
daytime and nighttime operation
of
the DRL and the
ALC systems.
If
the light sensor senses a reduction in
lighting that lasts longer than 20 seconds,
it
will activate
the nighttime lamps.
If
you are driving through a
parking garage, heavy overcast weather, a tunnel or
fueling your vehicle in a low light area, the ALC will
turn on your low-beam headlamps at a normal
brightness along with the taillamps, sidemarker, park
lamps and the instrument panel lights.
The
radio lights
will be dimmer.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog
Lamps
(If
Equipped)
The
button for your fog
lamps is beside the
instrument panel
intensity control.
Push
the
button
to
turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the button will glow when the fog lamps
are
on.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
The fog lamps will turn
off
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are turned
on.
When the high beams are
turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensitv Control
You
can brighten or dim the instrument panel cluster
lights by rotating the
INT
LIGHTS switch.
Rotating the wheel to
MAX
will turn on the
courtesy lamps.
Illuminated Entry System
When
you
lift the outside handle
of
either front door or
open either rear
door,
the lamps inside your vehicle will
go
on. These lamps will fade
out
after about
40
seconds,
or when the ignition
is
turned on after all doors have
been closed. If the ignition was recently turned
off,
the
lamps will fade out after four seconds. These lamps will
also
go
on when you press the
DOOR
or UNLOCK
button
on
the optional Remote
Lock
Control transmitter.
If
the ignition has been off for less than two minutes,
the lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
15
seconds after your
key
is
removed from the ignition
to
provide an illuminated exit.
Front Reading Lamps
(If
Equipped) Front Map Lamps
(If
Equipped)
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps will come
on when
you
open the doors.
To turn on a reading lamp when the doors
are
closed,
press the button. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If your vehicle has a
sunroof,
it will have a rearview
mirror and lamps. The lamps go on when you open the
doors. When the doors are closed,
turn
the lamps on and
off with the switch.
Rear Reading Lamps
(If
Equipped)
I
These overhead lamps and the interior courtesy lamps
will come on when you open the doors.
To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed,
push the button. Push it again to turn off the lamp.
nunk
Lamp
The
trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.
Battery Saver
Your Oldsmobile is equipped with a battery saver
feature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, footwell or
glove box) is left
on
when the ignition is turned
off,
the
battery saver system will automatically shut the lamp
off
after
20
minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.
To
reactivate the interior lamps, either:
The ignition must be turned on,
The activated lamp switch must be turned off and
then
on
or
A
front door must be opened.
The battery saver feature will also be activated when
any door
of
your vehicle is left open.
Also,
if
your vehicle is left with the ignition turned off
for over
24
days, battery power to your clock and audio
system will be turned off to reduce battery drain. When
the ignition is turned on again, battery power will be
resupplied. However, under these conditions,
it
will be
necessary to reset the clock and audio system settings.
2-48
Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
To
reduce glare from lights behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
Power Remote Control Mirror
(If
Equipped)
This
selector knob, located
on the driver’s side door,
controls both outside
rearview mirrors.
Select the mirror you want to adjust by rotating the knob
to the left or right. Adjust each mirror
so
that you can
just see the side
of
your
vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position..
Turn the knob to the center to turn the remote control
mirror off.
2-49
Convex Outside Mirr-r
Your passenger’s side mirror
1s
c%rR&X.
A
convex
mirror’s surface is curved
so
you
can see more from the
driver’s seat.
‘3N:
~
A
convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle
on
your right. Check your
inside mirror
or
glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Glove
Box
Use one
of
the vehicle’s keys
to
lock and unlock the
glove
box.
To
open, pull the glove
box
handle
toward
you.
2-50
Center Console Storage Area
Center Console Cupholder
The armrest opens
into
a
storage area for cassette tapes,
gloves, etc.
To
open it, lift up
on
driver’s side front
portion of
the
armrest.
A
tissue holder
is
located under
the lid
of
the armrest. There
is
also an accessory power
outlet located in
the
front storage armrest.
To
use the
accessory power outlet, see “Accessory Power Outlet”
later in this section.
The
console provides space for holding
a
cup or soft
drink.
To
access the cupholder, pull the lid forward.
2-51
Sunglasses
Storage
Place your sunglasses
in
the open area located above
you in the overhead console, or front compartment in
the center console.
Rear Seat Cupholder
The rear seat cupholder is located
on
the back
of
the
center console.
To
access the rear seat cupholder, pull
the door down.
Convenience Net
(If
Equipped)
Your
vehicle may have a convenience net.
You’ll
see
it
just inside the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during
sharp
turns or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net
so
that
it
will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-52
Ashtray
and
Lighter
Lift the cover
to
reveal the front ashtray in the front
storage armrest.
To
open the rear ashtray, rotate it in either direction. Lift
it
out by pushing down on the snuffer.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers or other flammable things into
your ashtrays. Lit cigarettes
or
other smoking
materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
To
use the lighter, just push it in
all
the way and let
go.
When it’s ready, it will
pop
back by itself.
I
NOTICE:
If
you
hold
a
cigarette lighter
in
with your
hand
while it
is
heating, it won’t
be
able to back away
from the heating element when
it’s
ready. That
can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and
the heating element.
2-53
Sunvisors
To
block out glare,
you
can swing down the visors.
You
can
also
swing them
to
the side.
Visor
Vanity
Mirror
Open the visor cover to expose the vanity mirror.
Accessory Power Outlet
The accessory power outlet is located in the front storage
armrest. You can use it to plug
in
an
additional electrical
accessory. Just open the armrest lid and remove the plug
from
the
outlet.
Be sure
to
follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with any electrical accessory
you
install.
The
accessory power outlet
is
protected by
a
fuse and has
a
maximum current level.
Garment
Hook
Push down on the tab
marked with a hanger
symbol to fold down the
garment hook.
2-54
Sunroof
(If
Equipped)
Open the sunshade
by
hand when using the
vent position.
Press and hold the front
of
the switch to close the glass
panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your Oldsmobile has an electrical failure.
I
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to force the sunshade forward of
the sliding glass panel. Damage
will
occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly.
Press and release the rear
of
the switch and the sunroof
will open to the vent position.
Press the rear of
the
switch again to open the glass panel
and the sunshade. Press the switch again
to
stop the
panel in any position.
2-55
Instrument
Panel
\/I
2-56
Your instrument panel is designed
to
let you know at
a
glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel you have used and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
The main components
of
your instrument panel are:
A. Vent
B.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
C. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and Horn
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
E.
Instrument Cluster
E
Rear Window Defogger
G.
Climate Control System
H.
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
I.
Glove
Box
J.
Gear Shift Lever
K.
Ashtray
L.
Audio System
M.
Windshield Wipermasher Stalk
N.
Ignition Switch
0.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Switch
(If
Equipped)
P.
Fog Lamps Switch
(If
Equipped)
Q.
Hood Release Lever
R. Instrument Panel Intensity Control/Interior Lamps
S.
Fuse Panel
2-57
Instrument
Panel
Cluster
Your Oldsmobile
is
equipped
with
this cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on
the following pages. Be sure
to
read them.
2-58
Speedometer
and
Odometer
Your speedometer
lets
you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in
the
United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Your Oldsmobile has a tamper resistant odometer. If you
see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll
know
that
someone has probably tried to turn it back,
so
the
numbers may not be true.
You
may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed.
If
the new one can be set to the
mileage total
of
the old odometer, then
it
must be. But if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero and
a
label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Trip
Odometer
The trip odometer can tell
you how far you have
driven since you last
reset it.
To
reset the
trip odometer to zero,
press the knob below it.
2-59
.
--
Tachometer
The tachometer shows your
\
Q‘
000
d
8
engine speed in revolutions
o
5
6
7%
per minute
(rpm).
\3
NOTICE:
Do
not run your engine at speeds in the red area,
or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before
it
becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one
of
your vehicle’s functions.
As
you
will see
in
the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar
with
this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one
of
your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s
a
problem with your vehicle.
When one
of
the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be
a
problem, check the section that tells
you
what to
do
about
it.
Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting
to
do
repairs can
be
costly
--
and even
dangerous.
So
please get
to
know your warning lights
and gages. They’re
a
big help.
2-60
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to
RUN
or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for about
20
seconds,
then it will flash for about
55
seconds.
If
the driver’s
belt
is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR
BAG.
The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the
air.
bag sensor, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you
start
your
engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should
go
out. This means
the system is ready.
AIR
BAG
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If
the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
ready to warn you
if
there is a problem.
2-61
Charging
System
Indicator Light
The charging system
indicator light will come on
when you start the engine,
then it should go out.
+I
If
it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It
could indicate that you have a loose generator drive
belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain
to
turn
off
all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake
System
Warning
Light
Your
Oldsmobile’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts.
If
one part isn’t working, the other part
can still work and stop
you.
For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If
the
warning light comes
on,
there could be a brake
problem or the brake fluid level could be low. Have your
brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
I
II
United States Canada
This light should come on briefly when you
turn
the
ignition key to
RUN.
If
it doesn’t come
on
then, have it
fixed so it
will
be ready to warn
you
if there’s a problem.
2-62
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You
may
notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop.
If
the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
-:\
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is
on.
Driving
with the brake system warning light
on
can lead
to an accident.
If
the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When
the
ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If
it
stays on after your parking brake is fully
released,
it
means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With
the
anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when
you
start your
engine and it will stay
on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to
OFF.
Or, if the
light comes
on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving, your Oldsmobile
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
isn’t
on,
you still have brakes, but
you
don’t have
anti-lock brakes.
If
the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and
there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake
System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to
RUN.
If
the
light doesn’t come
on
then, have
it
fixed
so
it will be
ready to warn you if there is
a
problem.
2-63
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
(If
Equipped)
ETS
OFF
With the Enhanced Traction
System
(ETS),
this warning
light should come on briefly
as
you
start
the
engine. If
the warning light doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be ready to warn
you
if
there’s a problem.
If
it
stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your Enhanced Traction System
and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
If
you turn the system off by pressing the button on
the instrument panel, the warning light will come on
and stay on.
To
turn the system back on, press the
button again. The warning light should go
off.
(See
“Enhanced Traction System’’ in the Index for more
information.)
0
The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on
if
your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If
the system is turned on and the warning light stays
on after your parking brake
is
fully released, it
means there’s a problem with the system.
If
the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period
of
time when the
system
is
turned on and the parking brake is fully
released, your vehicle needs service.
2-64
Enhanced Traction System Active Light
(If
Equipped)
LOW
TRAC
When your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting
wheel spin, this light will
come on. Slippery road
conditions may exist
if
the
Enhanced Traction System
active light comes on,
so
adjust your driving
accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
W
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If
the
gage pointer moves into
the red area, your engine
is too hot! It means that
your engine coolant
has overheated.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If
the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
there to tell you when the system is active.
If you have been operating
your
vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull
off
the road, stop
your vehicle and turn
off
the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-65
Low
Coolant Warning Light
--I
If
this light comes on and
LOW
COOLANT
stays on, the vehicle should
promptly be pulled off
the road and the coolant
level checked.
See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index. If there are visible
signs
of
steam, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index
before opening the hood. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as you can.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine
Light)
CHECK
ENGINE
Your Oldsmobile is
equipped with a computer
which monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition and
emission control systems.
This system
is
called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
(In
Canada,
OBD
I1
is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by
the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-64
NOTICE:
If you keep driving
your
vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This
could
lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you
it
is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running.
If
the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
0
Light Flashing
--
A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Retailer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light
On
Steady
--
An emission control system
malfunction has been detected
on
your vehicle.
Retailer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light
Is
Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If
you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light
Is
On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so,
stop
the
vehicle.
Find a safe place
to
park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10
seconds and restart the
engine.
If
the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following.
If
the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to
your
retailer or qualified service center
for
service.
2-67
--
If
the
Lipht
Is
On
Steady
YOU
may
be
ame to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If
so,
reinstall the
fuel
cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine
if
the fuel
cap has been
left
off or improperly installed.
A
loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere.
A
few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light
off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If
so,
your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out.
A
few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If
so,
be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index).
Poor
fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change
the
fuel brand
you
use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to
turn
the light off.
If none of
the
above steps have made the light turn off,
have your retailer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-68
Oil
Pressure Warning
Light
This light tells
you
if
there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
This
light can come on briefly, which is normal and
doesn’t show a problem:
0
As
a bulb check, the light comes on
when
you turn
your key
to
RUN
and goes off when the engine
is
started. If
it
doesn’t, be sure to have it fixed
so
it
will
be there
to
warn you.
For the four cylinder engine, when idling at a stop
sign, the light may blink on and then off. In addition,
if you make
a
hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment.
But,
when this light
comes on
and
stays
on,
it means oil
isn’t going through your engine properly.
You
could
be
low on oil, or you might have some other oil problem.
Don’t keep driving
if
the oil pressure is low.
If
you do, your engine can become
so
hot that it
catches fire.
You
or others could
be
burned.
Check your oil
as
soon
as
possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and
is
not covered by
your warranty.
Check Oil Light
(If
Equipped) Passlock Warning Light
CHECK
OIL
If
you have a
3
100 engine,
this light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine.
If
the
light doesn’t
come on, have it repaired.
If
the light comes on and
stays on after starting your
vehicle, your engine oil
level should be checked.
SECURITY
This light will come
on
briefly when you turn the
key toward the START
position. The light will stay
on until the engine starts.
Prior to checking the oil level, be sure your vehicle has
been shut off for several minutes and is on a level
surface. Check the oil level on your dipstick and bring it
to the proper level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
NOTE:
A
false CHECK
OIL
light may be generated
when parking on steep grades.
The
oil
level monitoring system only checks
oil
level
during the brief period between key on and engine
crank. It does not monitor engine oil level when the
engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check is
only performed if the engine has been turned off for a
considerable period of time allowing the oil normally in
circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
If
the light flashes, the Passlock system has entered a
tamper mode,
If
the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your retailer.
2-70
Cruise Light
The
CRUISE
light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control.
CRUISE
Up
Shift Light (Manual Transaxle)
This light comes on when
you
need
to
shift to the next
higher gear. See “Manual
Transaxle” in the Index.
Low Washer Light
LOW
WASH
Check
Gages
Light
CHECK
GAGES
The
LOW
WASH
FLUID
light will come on when
you turn on the ignition, and
the fluid container is less
than one-third full.
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
If
it
stays on, or if it comes on
and stays
on
while you are
driving, check your various
gages to see
if
they are in
the warning zones.
Fuel
Gage
W
UNLEADED
FUEL
ONLY
Your fuel gage tells
you
about how much fuel
you
have left, when the ignition
is
on. When the indicator
nears
EMPTY
(E),
you
still
have a little fuel left, but
you should eet more soon.
Here are four things that
some
owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
0
0
0
0
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads
FULL
(F).
It
takes a little more
or
less fuel to fill
up
than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half
full,
but it actually took
a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
The gage moves a little when
you
turn
a
corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to
EMPTY
(E)
when you
turn off the ignition.
fi
NOTES
fi
NOTES
2-74
Section
3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In
this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Oldsmobile.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
Comfort Controls
Climate Control System
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
3
-7
3
-9
3-
19
3-2
1
3-2
1
3 -22
3-23
3-23
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control
(If
Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Rear Window Defogger Antenna
Comfort
Controls
With this system, you can control the ventilation and
heating in your vehicle.
Your vehicle also has
the
flow-through ventilation
system described later in this section.
Climate Control System
8
Fan Knob
The left control
knob
sets the fan speed.
To
select the
force of air you want, turn the knob. The fan is always
running unless the mode control
is
moved to
OFF.
Temperature Knob
The center control
knob
regulates the temperature
of
the
air coming through the system. Turn the knob toward
the red to increase the temperature and toward the blue
to decrease the temperature.
Mode Knob
The right control knob changes the functions of
your system.
MAX:
Use for maximum cooling. This setting
recirculates much
of
the air inside your vehicle
so
it
maximizes your air conditioner’s performance and your
vehicle’s fuel economy.
NORM:
Use for normal cooling on hot days. This
setting cools outside air and directs it through the
instrument panel outlets.
3-2
BI-LEV:
Use on cool, but sunny days. This setting
brings in the outside air, but directs
it
in two ways. The
cool air is directed to the upper portion of your body
through the instrument panel outlets, but slightly
warmer air is directed through the heater ducts and
defroster vents. At times this temperature difference
may be more apparent than others.
The air conditioner compressor
is
enabled in all three air
conditioning positions.
VENT
Use when outside temperatures are mild, and
little heating or cooling is needed. Airflow comes
through the instrument panel outlets. Set the center
control knob to the temperature desired.
HEAT
This setting brings heated air through the heater
ducts, and some through the windshield defroster vents.
If you have the optional engine coolant heater (engine
block heater) and use it during cold weather,
0°F
(-
18
O
C)
or lower, your heating system will more quickly
provide heat because the engine coolant is already
warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
DEFOG:
This setting divides airflow equally between
the heater ducts and the windshield defroster vents.
DEF:
This setting directs air through the
windshield defroster vents located on top
of
the
instrument panel.
Air
Conditioning
The air conditioner and heater work best if you keep
your windows closed while using them. Your vehicle
also has the flow-through ventilation system described
later in this section.
Your system has three air conditioner settings in
addition to the standard climate control system. Before
using your air conditioner on very hot days, open the
windows long enough
to
let hot inside air escape. This
reduces the amount
of
work your air conditioner’s
compressor will have to do, which should help
fuel economy.
Heating
On cold days, use HEAT with the temperature
knob
all
the way in the red area. The system will bring in outside
air, heat
it
and send
it
to
the floor ducts.
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use
it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s
cold outside
(O’F
(-18°C)
or lower).
An
engine coolant
heater warms
the
coolant your engine and heating
system use to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
Defogging and
Defrosting
There are two settings for clearing your windows. For
each setting, adjust the temperature control as desired.
To rapidly defrost the windshield, rotate the temperature
control to maximum heat and rotate the mode control to
the defrost symbol. Rotate the
fan
to the highest speed.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
vents. The side window defogger vents are located on
each end of the instrument panel. For additional side
window defogging, rotate the mode control to the
BI-LEV position, rotate the fan control to the highest
speed and aim the side vents on the instrument panel to
the side window. For increased airflow to the side vents,
close the center vents.
3-4
Rear
Window Defogger
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the
rear window.
Press the defogger switch. The indicator light will glow.
If your vehicle is traveling under
45
mph
(70
km/h), the
rear window defogger will turn off automatically after
about
10
minutes
of
use.
If
your
vehicle is traveling
over
45
mph
(70
km/h), the defogger will operate
continuously. You can turn the defogger
off
by turning
off the ignition
or
pressing the switch again.
Do
not attach a temporary vehicle license across the
defogger grid
on
the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use
a
razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside
of
the rear window.
If
you
do,
you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
Your Oldsmobile’s flow-through ventilation system
supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the fan
is running.
Air
Outlets
Adjust the direction
of
airflow by moving the louvered
vents with the center control knob.
Ventilation
Tips
0
Keep
the
hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside
of
your windows.
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn
the
fan control to the highest setting for a few moments
before driving
off.
This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Audio
Systems
Your Delco@ audio system has been designed to operate
easily and give years
of
listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if
you
acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how
to
operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into
it.
Setting
the
Clock
Press and hold
HR
until the correct hour appears. The
letter A or P may appear on the display for
AM
or
PM.
Then, press and hold
MN
until the correct minute
appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on
or off.
3-6
AM-PM
Stereo
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL:
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off.
To
increase volume, turn the
knob
clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL:
Press this button briefly to recall
the
station
being played or to display the clock.
To
change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock
will
show for
a
few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM:
Press this button to switch between AM,
FMl
and
FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it
extends. Turn it
to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK:
Press the up or down arrow to
go
to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN:
Press this button and release
it
to listen
to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then
go
on
to the next station.
Press the button again to stop scanning. The sound will
mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display.
If
you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change to
P
SCAN mode.
P
SCAN will
appear
on
the display.
PUSHBUTTONS:
The five numbered pushbuttons let
you
return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
15
stations (five
AM,
five
FM1
and five
FM2).
Just:
1.
Turn
the radio on.
2.
Press
AM-FM
to select the band.
3.
Tune in
the
desired station.
4.
Press
and
hold one of the five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
5.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P
SCAN:
Press
SCAN
for more than two seconds, and
P
SCAN
will appear
on
the display. The radio will
go
to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press
SCAN
again
to
stop scanning.
Setting the Tone
BASS:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
TREB:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it
to
increase or decrease
treble.
If
a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL:
Press
this knob lightly
so
it
extends. Turn the knob
to move the sound to
the
left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE:
Press the knob lightly
so
it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AM-FM
Stereo
with
Cassette Tape Player
and
Automatic
Tone
Control
(If
Equipped)
RCL:
Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock.
To
change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the
RCL
button until you see the display you want, then
hold the RCL button until the display flashes.
If
you
press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will
show for a few seconds.
Finding a Station
Playing
the
Radio
PWR-VOL:
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off.
To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AM-FM:
Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK:
Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN:
Press this button and release
it
to
listen to
stations
for
a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop
for
a few seconds, then go on
to
the next station.
Press the button again to stop scanning. The sound will
mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display. If you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change
to
P
SCAN mode. P SCAN will
appear on the display.
3-9
PUSHBUTTONS:
The five numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
15 stations (five AM, five FMl and five FM2). Just:
1.
Turn the radio on.
2.
Press AM-FM to select the band.
3.
Tune
in the desired station.
4.
Press TONE to select the equalization that best suits
the type of station selected.
5.
Press and hold one of
the
five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone that
you
selected will also be automatically selected
for
that button.
6.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P
SCAN:
Press SCAN for more than two seconds, and
P
SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for
a
few seconds, then go
on
to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again
to
stop scanning.
Setting
the
Tone
BASS:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob
to
increase or decrease bass. When you use this
control, the radio’s tone setting will switch to manual.
TREB:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
tone setting will switch to manual. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
TONE:
This feature allows
you
to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for jazz, vocal,
pop, rock and classical stations. JAZZ will appear on the
display when you first press TONE. Each time you press
it,
another setting will appear
on
the display. Press it
again after CLASSIC appears and MANUAL will
appear. Manual tone control will return to the BASS and
TREB knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB
knobs, control will return to them and MANUAL
will appear.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the knob
to move the sound
to
the left or right speakers.
The
middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE:
Press the knob lightly
so
it
extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between
the
speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing
a
Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well in this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is
on,
but the radio is off, the tape
can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear
nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press EJECT
to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the
VOL,
FADE, BAL,
TREB, BASS and TONE controls just as you do for the
radio. The display will show TP with a box around it
and an arrow to show which side of the tape
is
playing.
Your tape bias is set automatically. When a metal or
chrome tape is inserted, HI-BIAS appears on the
display. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is
off,
first press EJECT or
RCL.
If
E
and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
0
ElO:
The tape is tight and the player can’t turn
the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to
turn
the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
0
Ell:
The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly
or
if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your retailer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it
to your retailer when reporting the problem.
REV
(1):
Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by
using
TUNE.
3-
11
FWD
(2):
Press this button
to
advance quickly to
another part of
the
tape. Press the button again to return
to
playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected
station while the tape advances. You may select stations
during
FWD
operation by using TUNE.
PROG
(3):
Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
10
(4):
Press
this
button to reduce background noise.
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby@ Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
TONE:
Press this button to select a tone while playing a
cassette. The tone will be automatically set whenever
you play a cassette tape.
SEEK:
Press the up or down arrow to search for the
next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must
hme at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for
SEEK
to work. After the selection has been
playing for at least eight seconds, press the SEEK down
arrow to return
to
the beginning of the selection.
SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each selection for a
few seconds. The tape will go
to
the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute,
SCAN
will appear on the display and the tape direction
arrow will blink while scanning.
AM-FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is
in
the player. The tape will stop but remain in the player.
TAPE
AUX:
If you have a tape inserted and the radio is
playing, press TAPE AUX to play your tape.
To
return
to the radio while a tape is playing, press
AM-FM.
The
inactive tape will remain safely inside the radio for
future listening.
EJECT
Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio and ignition
off
if this button
is
pressed first.
If
you leave a cassette tape
in
the player while listening to
the radio,
it
may become warm.
CLN:
If
this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean
it
as soon as possible to
prevent damage to
the
tapes and player. See “Care of
Your
Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
---
to
show the indicator was reset,
3-12
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control
(If
Equipped)
RCL:
Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock.
To
change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the
RCL
button until you
see
the display
you
want, then
hold the RCL button until the display flashes. If you
press the button when the ignition is
off,
the clock will
show for a few seconds.
Finding
a
Station
AM-FM:
Press this button to switch between
AM,
FM1
and
FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE:
Press this knob lightly so
it
extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK:
Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL:
Press this knob
to
turn the system on and
off. To increase volume,
turn
the knob clockwise. Turn
it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
SCAN:
Press this button and release it to listen
to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then go on
to
the next station.
Press
the
button again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display. If you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change to
P
SCAN mode. P SCAN will
appear on the display.
3-13
PUSHBUTTONS:
The five numbered pushbuttons let
you return
to
your favorite stations. You can set up to
15
stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). Just:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn the radio on.
Press AM-FM to select the band.
Tune in the desired station.
Press TONE to select the equalization that best suits
the type of station selected.
Press and hold one of the five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone that
you
selected will also be automatically selected for
that button.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P
SCAN:
Press SCAN for more than two seconds, and
P SCAN will appear
on
the display. The radio will go
to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds, then go on
to
the next preset station.
Press SCAN again
to
stop scanning.
Setting the Tone
BASS:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob
to
increase or decrease bass. When you use this
control, the radio’s tone setting will switch to manual.
TREB:
Press this knob lightly
so
it
extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out.
Turn
the knob to increase or
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
tone setting will switch to manual. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
TONE:
This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for jazz, vocal,
pop, rock and classical stations. JAZZ will appear on the
display when you first press TONE. Each time you press
it, another setting will appear on the display. Press
it
again after CLASSIC appears and MANUAL will
appear. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also,
if
you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and MANUAL will appear.
Adjusting
the
Speakers
BAL:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends.
Turn
the knob
to move the sound to
the
left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
3-14
FADE:
Press the knob lightly
so
it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing
a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well
in
this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape
can be inserted and will begin playing.
If
you hear
nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While
the
tape
is
playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
TREB,
BASS
and
TONE
controls just
as
you do for the
radio. The display will show TP with a box around it
and an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
Your tape bias is set automatically. When a metal or
chrome tape is inserted, HI-BIAS appears
on
the
display. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is
off, first press EJECT or RCL.
If
E
and a number appear on the radio display and the
tape won’t play because
of
an error, it could be that:
E10: The tape
is
tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not
turn
easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape
to
make sure your player is
working properly.
0
El1:The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your retailer.
If
your radio
displays an error number, write
it
down and provide it to
your retailer when reporting the problem.
REV (1): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press
it
again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by
using
TUNE.
FWD
(2):
Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected
station while the tape advances.
You
may select stations
during FWD operation by using TUNE.
PROG
(3):
Press this button to play the other side
of
the tape.
00
(4):
Press this button to reduce background noise.
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby@ Noise Reduction
is
manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
TONE:
Press this button to select a tone while playing a
cassette. The tone will be automatically set whenever
you play a cassette tape.
SEEK:
Press the up or down arrow to search for the
next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for SEEK to work.
SCAN:
Press this button to listen
to
each selection for
a
few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go
on
to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute
while scanning, SCAN will appear on the display and
the tape direction arrow will blink while scanning.
AM-FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is
in
the
player. The tape will stop but remain
in
the player.
TAPE-CD:
Press this button if you have a disc
loaded
in
the changer and the radio is playing, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE-CD to switch
between the tape and compact disc
if
both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
EJECT
Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. If
you leave
a
cassette tape in the player while listening
to
the radio,
it
may become warm.
CLN:
If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator.
The
radio will display
---
to
show the indicator was reset.
3-16
Playing a Compact Disc
The CD player will play either norrnal-size discs or the
smaller
8
cm discs with an adapter.
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing.
Note that when the disc is inserted, CD will be
displayed. When the disc
is
playing, a box will appear
around CD on the display.
If
you select a tone setting for
your CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
As
each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear in the display.
If
E
(error) and a number appear on the radio display
and the disc comes out,
it
could be that:
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
0
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0
The air is very humid.
If
so,
wait about an hour and
try again.
If
any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your retailer.
If
your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it
to
your retailer when reporting the problem.
REV
(1):
Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
FWD
(2):
Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
PROG
(3):
Press this button to go to the next track.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through
the
disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
00
(4):
Press this button to reduce background noise.
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
RDM
(5):
Press this button
to
hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order.
RDM
will appear on the
display when you press this button.
TONE:
Press this button to select a tone while playing a
compact disc. The tone will be automatically set
whenever you play a compact disc.
3-17
SEEK:
Press the down arrow to go
to
the start
of
the
current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving rearward or forward through the disc.
SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each selection for a
few seconds. The disc will go to the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on
to
the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute
while scanning, SCAN will appear on the display and
the disc direction arrow will blink while scanning.
RCL:
Press this button
to
see which track
is
playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has
been playing.
To
change what is normally shown on the
display (track or elapsed time), press the button until
you see the display you want, then hold the button until
the display flashes. While elapsed time is showing,
EL
TM
will appear on the display.
AM-FM:
Press this button
to
play the radio when a
disc is
in
the player.
TAPE-CD:
Press this button to change to the tape or
disc function when the radio
is
on
and either
a
tape or
CD is inserted. Press
AM-FM
to return
to
the radio
while
a
CD or tape is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
If
you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer
is loaded, the TAPE-CD button
will
activate the changer
and a box will be lighted around CDC in the display.
EJECT
Press this button to remove the compact disc
or cassette tape. The item with the box around
it
on
the
display will eject and the radio will play. EJECT may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes
and compact discs may be loaded with the radio and
ignition off if this button is pressed first.
If
you leave a
compact disc in the player while listening
to
the radio, it
may become warm.
3-18
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK” is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If
THEFTLOCK
is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
It
is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than
15
seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step
4.
1.
Write down any three or four-digit number from
000
to
1999
and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2.
Turn the ignition to
ACCESSORY
or
RUN.
3.
Turn
the
radio off.
4.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together. Hold them down
until
---
shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5.
Press MN and
000
will appear on the display.
6.
Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
7.
Press
HR
to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
with your code.
8.
Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show
REP
to
let
you know that you
need to repeat Steps
5
through
7
to confirm your
secret code.
9.
Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
3-19
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After
a
Power
Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15
seconds between steps:
1.
LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2.
Press MN and
000
will appear
on
the display.
3.
Press
MN
again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4.
Press
HR
to make the first one or two digits agree
5.
Press
AM-FM
after you have confirmed that
the
with your code.
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show
SEC,
indicating the radio
is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display.
You
will have to wait
an
hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When
you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before
INOP
appears.
If
you lose or forget your code, contact your retailer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code
as
follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Turn the radio off.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together. Hold them down
until
SEC shows
on
the display.
Press
MN
and
000
will appear on the display.
Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with
your code.
Press
HR
to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
Press
AM-FM
after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show
---,
indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If
the code entered is incorrect, SEC
will
appear
on
the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power
is
removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and
LOC
will
appear on the display.
3-20
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power
Loss”
earlier in
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
To
help avoid hearing loss
or
damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
FM Stereo
FM
stereo will give you the best sound. But
FM
signals
will reach only about
10
to
40
miles
(16
to
65
km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and
go.
AM
The range for most
AM
stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like stoms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until
it
is
too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes
of
sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful
to
your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control
on
your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to
it.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle
--
like
a
tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio
--
be sure you can add
what
you
want.
If
you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s
engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation
of
sound equipment
that
has
been added improperly.
So,
before adding sound equipment, check with
your retailer and
be
sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Care
of
Your
Cassette
Tape Player
A
tape player that
is
not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.
If
they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50
hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for
50
hours without
resetting the tape clean timer.
If
this message appears
on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you
should clean it as
soon
as possible to prevent damage
to
your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette
to
see
if
it
is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the
tape head
as
the hubs
of
the cleaner cassette turn.
A scrubbing action cleaning cassette
is
available through
your Oldsmobile retail facility. When using a cleaning
cassette, it
is
normal for the cassette to eject while
cleaning because your unit is equipped with a cut tape
detection feature and some cleaning cassettes may
appear as a broken tape.
If
the cleaning cassette is
ejected immediately from the tape player, you will need
to override the cut tape feature.
To
temporarily override this feature for vehicles with
Automatic Tone Control (for one insertion), follow
these steps:
Turn the ignition on.
0
Turn the radio off.
0
Press and hold TAPEPLAY until the tape symbol
flashes on the display.
Insert the cleaning cassette. (Insert the cassette at
least three times to ensure thorough cleaning.)
0
Eject the cleaning cassette.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is active again.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds
to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display
---
to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject
to
wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette
tape is
in
good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-22
Care of
Your
Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface
of
a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Rear Window Defogger Antenna
The rear window defogger with this option also serves
as a radio antenna. If you have this option, do not apply
aftermarket glass tinting. The metallic film in some
tinting materials will interfere with or distort the
incoming radio reception.
Be sure never
to
touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-23
-_
b%
NOTES
3-24
Section
4
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-11
4-13
4-13
4- 15
4-16
4-1
8
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control
of
a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss
of
Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-2 1
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-26
4-30
4-3 3
4-35
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device
in
your Oldsmobile: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”
in
the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions
are
about the most preventable
of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and
rural
driving. You never
know
when the vehicle in front of
you
is going
to
brake
or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol.
In
most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving.
In
recent years, some
17,000
annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of
alcohol, with more than
300,000
people injured.
Many adults
--
by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population
--
choose never
to
drink alcohol,
so
they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 2
1,
it’s
against the law
in
every
U.S.
state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what
if
people
do?
How much is “too much”
if
the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although
it
depends on each person and situation,
here
is
some general lnformation
on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that
is
consumed before and
during drinking
consume the alcohol.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb.
(82
kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355
ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about
0.06
percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks
if
each had
1
-
1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount
of
alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis
(3
ounces
or
90
ml
of
liquor each) within an hour,
the
person’s
BAC would be close to
0.12
percent.
A
person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that
a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man
of
her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law
in
many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of
0.10
percent. In a growing number of
U.S.
states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is
0.08
percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04
percent.
The
BAC
will be over
0.10
percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive
is
affected well below a BAC
of
0.10
percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05
percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05
percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in
a
collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05
percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06
percent has doubled his or her chance
of
having a
collision. At a BAC level of
0.10
percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision
is
12
times greater; at a
level
of
0.15
percent, the chance is
25
times greater!
The
body takes about an hour to rid itself
of
the alcohol
in one drink.
No
amount
of
coffee or number
of
cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What
if
there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A
person with even a moderate
BAC
might not be able
to react quickly enough
to
avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries
to
the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking
--
driver or passenger
--
is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than
if
the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even
a
small amount
of alcohol.
You
can have
a
serious
--
or even
fatal
--
collision
if
you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with
a
driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in
a
cab; or if
you’re with
a
group, designate
a
driver who will
not drink.
Control
of
a
Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to
go.
They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator.
All
three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves
perception time
and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s
perception time.
Then
you
have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s
reaction time.
Average
reaction time
is about
314
of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a
part.
So
do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even
in
3/4
of
a
second,
a
vehicle
moving at
60
mph
(1
00
km/h)
travels
66
feet
(20
m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface
of
the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet,
dry,
icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount
of
brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts
--
heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking
--
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if
you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down.
If
your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you
will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is
an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
1
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
1
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
You
slam
on the brakes. Here’s what happens with
ABS.
A
computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If
one
of
the wheels is about
to
stop rolling, the computer will
separately work
the
brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
You
can steer around
the
obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front
of
you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using
Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you.
You
may feel the system
working, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal.
Enhanced Traction System
(If
Equipped)
If
your vehicle has the optional four-speed automatic
transaxle,
it
also
has an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transaxle
to
limit wheel spin.
LOW
TRAC
This light will come on
when your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting
wheel spin. See “Enhanced
Traction System Active
Light” in the Index.
You
may feel or hear the system
working, but this is normal.
The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high
as
the shift lever position you’ve
chosen,
so
you should use the lower gears only when
necessary. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
4-9
ETS
OFF
When the system is on and
the parking brake is fully
released, this warning light
will come on to let you
know if there’s a problem
with the system. See
“Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light” in
the Index.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin, Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions,
you
should always leave the Enhanced
Traction System on. But you can turn the system off if
you ever need to. (You should turn
the
system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
To
turn the system on or off,
press the button on the
instrument panel
to
the left
of the steering column.
When you turn the system
off,
the Enhanced Traction
System warning light will come on and
stay
on, and the
indicator light on the button
will
go off.
If
the Enhanced
Traction System is limiting wheel spin when you press
the button to turn the system
off,
the warning light will
come on and the indicator light will go off
--
but the
system won’t turn
off
right away. It will wait until
there’s no longer a current need
to
limit wheel spin.
You
can turn
the
system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The Enhanced Traction System
warning light should go off, and the indicator light on
the button should come on.
4-10
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If
you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving
on
Curves
It’s important to take curves at
a
reasonable speed.
A
lot
of
the “driver lost control’’ accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver
or
beginner, each of
us
is subject to
the same laws
of
physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the
vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at
which the curve is banked, and
your
speed. While you’re
in
a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems
--
steering and
acceleration
--
have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Enhanced Traction system” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on
the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to
go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed
so
you
can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Steering
in
Emergencies
lull
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
p
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front
of
you. You can
avoid these problems by braking
--
if
you
can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action
--
steering around
the problem.
Your Oldsmobile can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to
the
left
or right depending on the space available.
S
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions, you can
turn
it a full
180
degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just
as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations
are
always
possible is
a
good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road
Recovery
Passing
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto
the
shoulder while
you’re driving.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
RECOVER
e*
PI
SLOW
DOWN
y,
Icl
!
7
edge
of
paved
surface
If the level of the shoulder
is
only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off
the
accelerator and then,
if
there is nothing
in
the way, steer
so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn
until the
right front
tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn
your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits
for
just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.
A
simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as
oncoming
traffic for several seconds.
A
miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender
to
frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents
--
the head-on collision.
So
here are some tips for passing:
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for
a
better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If
you can
see
a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A
broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty
of
approaching traffic.
4-13
Do
not get too close
to
the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially
if
you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
0
When
it
looks like a chance to pass is coming
up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move
so
you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And
if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait
for
another opportunity.
0
If
other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying
to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start
your left lane change signal before moving out
of
the
right lane to pass. When you are
far
enough ahead
of
the
passed vehicle to see its front
in
your inside mirror,
activate your right lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from
you
than it really
is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting
to
turn.
If
you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead
of
you. Perhaps you
can ease a 1itt.le to the right.
4-14
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road
to
do what the driver has asked.
In
any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying
to
steer and
constantly seek
an
escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In
a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
Oldsmobile’s three control systems. In
the
braking skid,
your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering in
a
curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid,
too
much throttle causes the driving wheels
to
spin.
A
cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If
you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember:
It helps avoid only
the
acceleration skid.
If
you do not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if
the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best
handled by easing your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle
to
go.
If
you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if
it
occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions.
It
is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause
the
tires
to
slide.
You may
not
realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues
--
such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface”
--
and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system
(ABS)
helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving
at
Night
Night driving
is
more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired
--
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
0
0
a
0
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview
mirror
to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If
you’re tired, pull
off
the road
in
a
safe place
and rest.
4-16
Night
Vision
No
one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase.
A
50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of
things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second
or
two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean
--
inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far
less
of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so
should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness
--
the inability to see
in
dim light
--
and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-17
Driving
in Rain and
on
Wet
Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as
well
because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise
to
go slower and be
cautious if rain starts
to
fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder
to
see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise
to
keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank
filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-1
8
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or
even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes.
Try
to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try-to slow down before you hit them.
A
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control
of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of
water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.
So
much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road.
If
you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If
you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of
your vehicle.
If
you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some
Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
0
0
Turn on your low-beam headlamps
--
not just
your parking lamps
--
to help make you more
visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by
road spray.
Have
good
tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-20
City
Driving
One
of
the
biggest problems with city streets is
the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch
out
for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get
a
city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of
the
city just as
you
would for a
cross-country trip.
0
Try to
use
the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat
a
green light as a warning signal.
A
traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection
or
may be running the
red light.
Mile for
mile,
freeways
(also
called thruways, parkways,
expressways,
turnpikes
or superhighways)
are
the safest
of
all roads. But they have their own special rules.
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
4-22
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on
to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving
on
a
Long
Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested.
If
you
must start when you’re not fresh
--
such as after a day’s
work
--
don’t plan to make
too
many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is
your vehicle ready for
a
long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If
it
needs
service, have
it
done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Oldsmobile retail facilities all across North America,
They’ll be ready and willing
to
help
if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Is
the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wil2er Blades:
Are they in good shape?
Fuel,
Engine
Oil, Other Fluids:
Have you checked
all levels?
Lumps:
Are
they
all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires:
They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to
the
recommended pressure?
Weather
Forecasts:
What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps:
Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway
Hypnosis
Is
there actually such
a
condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call
it
highway hypnosis, lack
of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of
road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires
on
the
road, the drone of the engine, and
the
rush
of
the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let
it
happen to you!
If
it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in
less
than
a
second,
and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are
some
tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If
you
get sleepy, pull
off
the
road into a rest, service
or
parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Hill
and
Mountain
Roads
Driving
on
steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat
or
rolling terrain.
4-24
If
you
drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard
on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to
know
is
this: let your engine do some
of
the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you
go
down a steep or long hill.
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You
would
then have poor braking or even none going
down
a
hill.
You
could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on
a
steep
downhill slope.
A
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in
NEUTRAL
(N)
or
with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to
do
all the work
of
slowing down. They could get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You
would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a
hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
0
0
0
0
Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest
gear possible.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center
of
the
road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As
you go over the top
of
a
hill,
be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car
or
an
accident.
You
may
see
highway signs
on
mountains that warn
of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones,
a
falling rocks area or
winding
roads. Be alert
to
these
and
take appropriate action.
4-25
Winter
Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your Oldsmobile in good shape for winter.
You
may want to put winter emergency supplies
in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of
windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
a
couple
of
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of
sand,
a
piece
of
old carpet or a couple
of
burlap bags
to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-26
Driving
on
Snow
or
Ice
Most
of
the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However,
if
there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road,
you
can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it
may
offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing
(32°F;
0”
C)
and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever
the
condition
--
smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow
--
drive with caution.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the
system on.
It
will improve your ability
to
accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though your
vehicle has this system, you’ll want to slow down and
adjust your driving to the road conditions. See
“Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.
If
you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System,
accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will
spin
and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-27
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on
a
slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock bralung system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than
you
would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
If
You’re
Caught
in
a
Blizzard
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps
of
trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an
overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear.
If
you see a patch
of
ice
ahead
of
you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the
snow.
Here
are
some
things to
do
to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn
on
your hazard flashers.
4-28
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you.
If you have
no
blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats
--
anything
you
can wrap around yourself
or
tuck under your clothing to keep
warm.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.
CO
could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it,
so
you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time
to
be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just
a
little
on
the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to
keep
warm, but be careful.
-
4-29
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need
a
well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engine
off
and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can.
To
help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or
so
until help comes.
Recreational
Vehicle
Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your
Oldsmobile behind another vehicle for use at your
destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment
designed for recreational towing. Follow the instructions
for the towing equipment.
Towing
Your
Vehicle
from
the
Front
Follow these steps:
1.
Put the front wheels on a dolly.
I
NOTICE:
I
Do
not tow your vehicle with the front wheels in
contact with the ground, or the automatic
transaxle could be damaged.
2.
Set the parking brake.
3.
Open the fuse panel on the driver’s side
of
the
instrument panel. Remove the fuse labeled
PRNDL. This will keep your battery from
draining while towing.
4.
Turn
the ignition key to
OFF
to unlock the steering
wheel. See “Ignition Positions” in the Index.
5.
Clamp the steering wheel
in
a straight-ahead
position, with a clamping device designed
for towing.
6.
Release
the
parking brake.
When you are finished towing, make sure you replace
the PRNDL fuse in the instrument panel fuse block.
Towing Your Vehicle
from
the Front
(Manual Transaxle)
P
m
nA
Tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground.
Follow these steps:
1.
Set the parking brake.
4-31
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the
fuse
panel on the driver’s side
of
the instrument
panel. Remove the fuse labeled
PRNDL.
This
will keep
your battery
from
draining while towing.
Turn the ignition key to
OFF
to unlock the steering
wheel and prevent the automatic door locks
from locking.
Shift your manual transaxle to NEUTRAL
(N).
Release the parking brake.
When you are finished towing, make sure you replace
the
PRNDL
fuse in the instrument panel fuse block.
I
NOTICE:
Make sure that the towing speed does
not
exceed
55
mph
(90
km/h), or your vehicle could be
badly damaged.
Towing
Your
Vehicle
from
the Rear
m
8
I
NOTICE:
Do
not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
4-32
Loading
Your
Vehicle
;o
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT. CTR.
RR.
TOTAL
LBS.
KG
MAX.
LOADING
&
GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE
SIZE
SPEED
PRESSURE
RTG PSVKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF
TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
FOR
ADDITIONAL
\
INFORMATION
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells
you
the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number
of
people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight
is
called the Vehicle Capacity Weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO
ALL
APPLI-
CABLE
U.S.
FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY,
BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS
IN
EFFECT
ON
THE
DATE
OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
MFD
BY
GENERAL MOTORS
CORP
DATE
GVWR GAWR FRT
GAWR
RR
The other label
is
the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells
you
the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).
The
GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’t carry more than
132
lbs.
(60
kg) in
your trunk.
4-33
Do
not load your vehicle
a
heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR.
If
you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control.
Also,
overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
I
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle
--
like suitcases,
tools,
packages,
or
anything else
--
they will go
as
fast
as
the vehicle goes.
If
you have to
stop
or turn quickly,
or
if
there is
a
crash, they’ll keep going.
A
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in
a
sudden stop or turn, or
in
a
crash.
0
0
0
0
0
Put things in the trunk
of
your vehicle. In
a
trunk, put them
as
far
forward as you can.
Try
to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle
so
that some
of
them
are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When
you
carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave
a
seat folded down unless you
need
to.
Towing
a
Trailer
If
you don't use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you
pull
a
trailer. For example,
if
the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well
--
or even
at
all.
You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull
a
trailer only
if
you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your Oldsmobile retailer
for advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Pulling
a
trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
To
pull
a
trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your Oldsmobile
~
retailer for important information about towing
'
a
trailer with your vehicle.
Do
not
tow
a
trailer
if
your vehicle is equipped
with
a
2.4L
(Code
T)
engine.
4-35
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with a
3
100
(Code
M)
engine and proper trailer towing
equipment.
To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity
is
for your vehicle, you should read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In
it
are
many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers.
So
please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If
You
Do
Decide To
Pull
A
Trailer
If
you
do, here are some important points:
0
0
a
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving.
A
good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control.
You
can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow
a
trailer at all during the first
1,000
miles
(1
600
km)
your new vehicle
is
driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first
500
miles
(800
km) that you
tow
a
trailer, don’t drive over
SO
mph
(80
km/h)
and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than
55
mph
(90
km/h))
to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-36
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight
of
the trailer,
the weight
of
the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight
of
the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs.
(450
kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It
depends on how you plan to use your
rig.
For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You
can ask your retailer for our trailering information
or advice,
or
you
can write us at:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O.
Box
30095
Lansing, MI 48909
In
Canada, write to:
General Motors
of
Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1 H
8P7
Weight
of
the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)
of
any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the
curb weight
of
the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-37
A
B
If
you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue
(A)
should weigh
10
percent of the total loaded
trailer weight
(B).
If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue
(A)
should weigh
12
percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper.
If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight
on
Your
Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. Then be sure
you
don’t
go
over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight
of
the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do
not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only
a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install
a
trailer hitch? If
you
do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
4-38
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of
the
trailer
so
that the tongue will not drop
to
the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them
to
the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack
so
you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes
so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And because you have anti-lock brakes,
do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you
do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
Driving with
a
Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with
the
added weight of
the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to
be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing
a
trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
4-39
Backing
Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer
to
the left, just move that hand
to the left.
To
move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to
come
in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal.
Do
this
so
your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing
a
Trailer
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even
if
the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when
they
are not.
It’s
important
to
check occasionally
to
be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift
to
a lower gear
before
you start
down a long or steep downgrade.
If
you don’t shift
down, you might have to
use
your brakes
so
much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, use the highest gear possible.
If
you
cannot maintain posted speeds, driving at a lower speed may
help avoid overheating your engine and transaxle.
If you have a manual transaxle with
FIFTH
(5)
gear,
it’s better not
to
use
FIFTH
(5)
gear. Just drive in
FOURTH
(4)
gear (or, as
you
need to, a lower gear).
4-40
Parking on Hills
2.
Let up on the brake pedal.
3.
Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4.
Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1.
Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK
(P)
yet, or into gear for a manual transaxle.
2.
Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3.
When the wheel chocks
are
in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4.
Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift
to
PARK (P), or REVERSE (R)
for a manual transaxle.
5.
Release the regular brakes.
When
You
Are Ready
to
Leave After
Parking
on
a Hill
1.
Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belt, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help
you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Towing
A
Trailer
(Except
3100
Engine)
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to
tow
a
trailer.
A-dl
$&I
NOTES
4-42
Section
5
Problems
on the
Road
Here you’ll find what
to
do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-13
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-21
5-22
5-32
5-33
If
a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact
Spare
Tire
If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
off.
Move the switch to the right
to make your front and rear
turn
signal lights flash on
and
off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key
is
in, and even
if
the key isn't in.
To
turn
off
the flashers, move the switch to the left.
When the hazard warning flashers
are
on, your turn
signals won't work.
5-2
Other
Warning
Devices
If
you
carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side
of
the road about
300
feet
(100
m)
behind
your vehicle.
Jump
Starting
If
your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables
to
start your
Oldsmobile.
But
please follow the steps here to
do
it
safely.
I
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying to
start
your Oldsmobile by pushing
or
pulling it could damage your vehicle, even
if
you
have a manual transaxle. And
if
you
have an
automatic transaxle, it won’t start that way.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
0
They contain acid that can burn you.
0
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricity to burn
you.
If
you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of
these things can hurt you.
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have
a
12-volt
battery with
a
negative ground system.
I
NOTICE:
I
If
the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2.
Get the vehicles close enough
so
the
jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your Oldsmobile, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the
parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N)
.
3.
Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn
off
all
lamps that aren’t needed, as well as radios. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In
addition, it could save your radio.
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4.
Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
I9
An electric fan can start
up
even when the engine
is
not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5.
Find the positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminals on
each battery.
5-4
A
CAUTION:
Using
a
match near
a
battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use
a
flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery
has
enough water.
You
don’t
need to add water to the Delco Freedom@ battery
installed in every new
GM
vehicle. But if
a
battery
has
filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.
If
it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation.
If
they do,
you
could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too. Before you
connect the cables, here are some things
you
should
know.
Positive
(+)
will go to positive
(+)
and
negative
(-)
will
go
to negative
(-)
or a metal engine
part. Don’t connect positive
(+)
to negative
(-)
or
you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other
parts,
too.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engines are running.
5-5
7.
Connect the red positive
(+)
cable to the positive
(+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the vehicle has one.
8.
Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive
(+)
terminal
of
the good
battery. Use a remote
positive
(+)
terminal if
the vehicle has one.
9.
Now connect the black
negative
(-)
cable to
the
good
battery’s
negative
(-)
terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of
the negative cable
doesn’t
go
to the
dead battery.
It
goes to a heavy unpainted metal part
on
the engine
of
the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-6
10. Attach
the
cable at least 18 inches
(45
cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection
is
just as good
there, but
the
chance
of
sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
11.
Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the
engine for a while.
12.
Try
to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries,
it
probably needs service.
13.
Remove the cables
in
reverse order
to
prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that
they
don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
no
I
A.
Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C.
Dead Battery
5-7
Towing
Your
Vehicle
Try
to have an Oldsmobile retailer or a professional
towing service tow your Achieva. They can provide the
right equipment and know how to tow your vehicle
without damage. (See ”Roadside Assistance” in the Index.)
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
Before you do anything,
turn
on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment, as described later
in
this section.
0
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
0
If
there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let
the
tow operator know
that
this
manual contains detailed towing instructions and
illustrations. The operator may want to see them.
I
t-
To
help avoid injury to you or others:
0
0
I.
0
0
0
Never let passengers ride in
a
vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe
or
posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing
it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
5-8
I
/A
CAUTION:
r
A
vehicle can fall from
a
car carrier if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause
a
collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it
is
transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut
by
sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key off. The steering wheel should be clamped
in
a
straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service.
Do
not use the vehicle’s
steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed
on
the drive wheels,
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the
drive wheels (see speed and distance restrictions later in
this section) or your transaxle will be damaged. If these
limits must be exceeded, then the drive wheels have to
be supported on a dolly.
Front
Towing
NOTICE:
Do
not tow with sling-type equipment or fascia
damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or car-carrier
equipment. Additional ramping may be required
for
car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and
wheel straps.
Towing
a
vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage
a
vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle
to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, install
a
towing dolly and
raise vehicle until adequate clearance
is
obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do
not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-10
Attach T-hook chains into
the slots in the bottom
of
the floor pan, just
behind the front wheels,
on
both sides.
These slots are to be used when loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate
safety chain around the
outboard end of each
lower control
arm.
Rear
Towing
Tow
Limits
--
55
mph (88
kmlh),
500
miles
(800
km)
5-11
NOTICE:
Do
not tow with sling-type equipment or the rear
bumper valance will be damaged. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing
a
vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle
to ground
or
vehicle to wheel-lift equipment.
To
help avoid damage, install
a
towing dolly and
raise vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
NOTE: The ignition must be in the
OFF
position
to
keep
automatic door locks from locking during tow.
Attach T-hook chains on
both sides in the slotted
holes in the bottom of the
frame rail just ahead of the
rear wheels.
These slots are to be used when loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.
11
Attach a separate chain to
5-12
Engine Overheating
You
will find a coolant temperature gage on
your
Oldsmobile’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index.
You
will also find
a
LOW
COOLANT
level warning light on your
Oldsmobile’s instrument panel. See “Low Coolant
Warning Light” in the Index.
If
Steam
Is
Coming
From
Your
Engine
/r\
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even
if
you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it
off
and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before
you
open the hood.
If
you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You
or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
I
i
NOTICE:
If
your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly
damaged. The costly repairs
would
not be
covered by your warranty.
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming
From Your
Engine
If
you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If
you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or
so:
1.
Turn
off
your air conditioner.
2.
Turn on your heater to
full
hot
at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3.
If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL
(N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving
--
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(@)
or
DRIVE
(D)
for automatic transaxles.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just
to
be safe, drive slower for about
10
minutes.
If
the
warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If
the
warning continues, pull
over,
stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still
no
sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see if
the warning stops. But then,
if
you still have the
warning,
turn ofthe engine and get everyone out
of
the vehicle
until
it
cools down.
You
may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
When
you
decide it's
safe
to lift the
hood,
here's what
you'll see:
2.4L
Engine
3100
Engine
A.
Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B.
Electric Engine
Fan
An electric fan under the hood can start up even
when the engine
is
not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-15
If
the coolant inside
the
coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until
it
cools down.
Lne coolant level should be at or above
FULL
COLD.
If
it isn’t, you may have a
leak
in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or
somewhere else in
the
cooling
system.
J
AUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be
very
hot. Don’t touch them. If
you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is
a
leak. If
you
run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
I
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
If
there seems
to
be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see
if
the electric engine fan
is
running.
If
the engine is
overheating, the
fan
should be running.
If
it isn’t, your
vehicle needs service.
5-16
How
to
Add
Coolant
to
the
Coolant
Surge
Tank
If
you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at
FULL
COLD, add
a
50/50
mixture
of
clean
water
(preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@ coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is
cool
before you do
it.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
more information.)
A
CAUTIOP
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap
--
even
a
little
--
they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap,
is
hot. Wait for the
cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure
cap
to
cool if
you
ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
-
5-17
A
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water
or
the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
50/50
mix
of
clean
water and
DEX-COOL@
coolant.
I
NOTICE:
In
cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So
use the recommended coolant.
A
CAUTION:
You can be burned
if
you spill coolant
on
hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on
a
hot engine.
5-18
1.
You
can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is
no
longer hot.
Turn
the pressure cap slowly about
one-quarter turn to the left and then stop.
If you hear
a
hiss, wait for that to stop.
A
hiss
means
there is still some pressure left.
2.
Then keep
turning
the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-19
3.
Then
fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mix,
up
to
FULL
COLD,
or just above the small cylinder
at the base
of
the opening.
4.
With
the
coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until
you
can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more
of
the proper mix to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches
FULL
COLD,
or just above
the small cylinder at the base
of
the opening.
5-20
5.
Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is tight.
If
a
Tire
Goes
Flat
It’s unusual for a tire
to
“blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly.
If
air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely
to
leak out slowly.
But if
you
should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what
to
do:
If
a
front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well
out
of the traffic lane.
A
rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require
the
same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle
to
go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop
--
well
off
the road
if
possible.
If
a tire goes flat, the next part
shows
how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-21
ianging
a
Flat
Tire
If
a
tire
goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly
to
a
level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people.
You
and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1.
Set the parking brake firmly.
2.
Put
an
automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK
(P),
or shift
a
manual transaxle to
FIRST
(1)
or
REVERSE (R).
3.
I'urn
off
the engine.
To
be even more certain the vehicle won't move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear
of
the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle,
at
the opposite end.
The following
steps
will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-22
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
Lift and remove the cover. (See “Compact Spare Tire”
later in this section for more information about the
compact spare.) You will find
the
jacking instructions
label on the underside of the tire cover.
Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift off the
adapter and remove the
spare tire.
Remove the jack and wheel wrench
from
the trunk.
Your vehicle’s jack and wheel wrench are store in
a
foam tray.
5-23
The tools you'll be using include the jack
(A)
and wheel
wrench
(B).
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1.
Remove the wheel nut caps, if your vehicle has them
(you may need to use the wheel wrench to loosen
and remove them, if your fingers do not fit into this
small area).
2.
On
some models, a cover plate must be removed to
find the wheel nuts. Carefully use the wedge end
of
the wheel wrench to pry
it
off.
5-24
3.
Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
18”
(46cm)
18”
(46cm)
4.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch
in
the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near
you.
c
Getting under
a
vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous.
If
the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a
vehicle when it is supported only by
a
jack.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.
To
help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure
to
fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
your vehicle.
1
NOTICE:
I
Do
not jack or lift the vehicle using the oil pan.
Pans could crack and begin to leak fluid.
5.
Raise the vehicle
by
rotating the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground
so
there
is
enough room
for
the spare tire
to
fit.
6.
Remove
all
of
the wheel nuts.
7-26
7.
Remove the wheel cover from the wheel,
if
your
vehicle has them. Then take
off
the flat tire.
8.
Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the w
,
or
on
the parts
to
which it
is
fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become
loose
after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change
a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency,
you
can use
a
cloth
or
a
paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use
a
scraper or wire
brush later,
if
you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you
do, the nuts might come
loose.
Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
9.
Replace the wheel nuts
with the cone end
of
the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand or with the wheel
wrench until the wheel
is
held against the hub.
10.
Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-28
11.
Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence, as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To
avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Incorrect wheel nuts
or
improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come
off.
This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new
GM
original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with
a
torque wrench to
100
lb-ft
(140
N-m).
Don’t try to put
a
wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut
caps in the
trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired
or replaced.
I I
I
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to put
a
wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
5-29
Storing
the
Flat
Tire
and
Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment
of
the vehicle could
cause injury.
In
a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Store the flat tire
in
the compact spare tire compartment.
Place the tire in the compartment, then secure the
adapter, extension (aluminum wheels only) and wing
bolt. Store the jack and wheel wrench
in
the foam tray.
B
I
A. Wrench
E.
Extension (Aluminum
B.
Jack
C.
Flat Road Tire
D.
Adapter
wheels only)
E
Wing Bolt
G.
Cover
H.
Nut
5-30
Storing the Spare Tire
and
Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment
of
the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop
or
collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon
as you
can.
See “Compact Spare Tire”
in
the Index. See the
storage instructions label to replace your compact spare
into your trunk properly.
B
A. Wrench
E.
Wing
Bolt
B.
Jack
E
Cover
C. Spare Tire
G.
Nut
D.
Adapter
5-31
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new,
it
can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60
psi
(420
Wa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is
made to
perform well at speeds up
to
65
mph
(105
km/h)
for
distances up to
3,000
miles
(5
000
km),
so
you can finish
your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want.
Of
course, it’s best
to
replace your spare
with a full-size tire as
soon
as you can. Your spare will
last longer and be in good shape in case
you
need
it again.
NOTICE:
I
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts
of
your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare
on
other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage
your
vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your
compact spare.
5-32
If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice
or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
is
If
you let your tires spin
at
high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin
the wheels above
35
mph
(55
kdh)
as
shown
on the speedometer.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of
your
vehicle
as
well as the tires.
If
you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking
Your
Vehicle To
Get
It
Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels.
If
your vehicle
has the Enhanced Traction System, you should turn
the system off. (See “Enhanced Traction System”
in the Index.) Then
shift
back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual
transaxle, between F’IRST
(1)
or SECOND
(2)
and
REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as
possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after
a
few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do
need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
in
the Index.
5-34
Section
6
Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care
of
your Oldsmobile. This section begins with service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information
about your vehicle, and a part devoted
to
its appearance care.
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-8
6- 12
6-18
6-
19
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-35
6-35
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the
Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Engine Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
6-40
6-48
6-49
6-5
1
6-52
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-56
6-6 1
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-63
6-1
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Oldsmobile
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your Oldsmobile
Cleaning Tires
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Dimensions
Doing Your
Own
Service Work
If
you want to do some of your own service work,
you’ll want to get the proper Oldsmobile Service
Manual.
It
tells you much more about how to service
your Oldsmobile than this manual can.
To
order the
proper service manual, see “Service and Owner
Your vehicle
has
an
air
bag system.
Before
attempting
to
do
your
own
service
work,
see “Servicing Your
Air
Bag-Equipped Oldsmobile”
in
the Index.
You
should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
C
A
“TION:
-I
You
can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged
if
you try to do service work on
a
vehicle without knowing enough about
it.
0
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
0
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.
If
you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall
off.
You
could be hurt.
6-2
I
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around
it.
This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your Oldsmobile retailer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87
octane or higher. At
a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM
D4814
in
the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved
gasoline specifications have been developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the
AAMA
specification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least
87.
If the octane is
less than
87,
you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at
87
octane or higher and you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label),
it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily
on
fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to
your authorized Oldsmobile retailer for diagnosis to
determine the cause
of
failure. In the event it
is
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Oldsmobile retailer for service.
/A
To
provide cleaner
air,
all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that
will
help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines
if
they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels
in Foreign Countries
If
you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper
fuel
may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To
check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can
also
write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1H
8P7
6-4
Filling
Your
Tank
,A
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
The cap is behind
a
hinged
door
on
the right side
of
your
vehicle.
6-5
To
open the fuel door, pull the fuel access handle on the
floor by the driver’s seat.
The
remote
fuel filler door release can help keep your
fuel tank from being siphoned. Always be sure the fuel
door
is
closed and latched after refueling.
While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the fuel door.
To
take off the cap,
turn
it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if
you
let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
6-6
1
/I\
C
*.UJON:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any
“hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Oldsmobile” in the Index.
When you put the cap back
on,
turn
it
to
the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you
fully
install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel
to
evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If
you need
a
new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your retailer can get one for you.
If
you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Checking
Things
Under
the Hood
I
A
CAU'I
:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
A
CAU
JON:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto
a
hot engine.
6-8
Hood
Release
The following sections tell you
how
to check fluids,
lubricants and important parts under the hood.
To
open the hood, first pull
the
HOOD
release handle
inside the vehicle.
Then go
to
the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release down
to
lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then just let
the
hood down and close it firmly.
6-9
2.4L
(CODE
T)
Engine
When
you
open
the
hnnd,
you’ll
see:
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
H.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
B.
Engine Oil
Fill
Cap
F.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Reservoir (if equipped)
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
G.
Windshield Washer Fluid
I.
Air Cleaner
D.
Automatic Transaxle Dipstick
Reservoir
J.
Battery
(if equipped)
3100
(CODE
M)
Engine
When you open the hood,
you'll
see:
A.
Engine Coolant Surge
Tank
B.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Engine
Oil
Fill Cap
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic I'ransaxle Dipstick
F.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
G.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
H.
Air
Cleaner
I.
Battery
6-11
Engine
Oil
CHECK
OIL
If your vehicle is equipped
with the
3100
engine, you
have a
CHECK
OIL light
on the instrument panel.
If the
CHECK
OIL light on the instrument panel comes
on,
it
means you need to check your engine oil level
right away. For more information, see “Check Oil
Light” in the Index. You should check your engine oil
level regularly; this is an added reminder.
2.4L
Engine
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order
to
get an accurate reading, the oil must
be
warm
and the vehicle must be
on
level ground.
6-12
Checking
Engine
Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove
it
again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
I
3100
Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is yellow. The dipstick
handle for the
2.4L
engine is located behind the engine.
The dipstick for the
3100
engine is located in front of
the engine, behind the fan.
Turn
off
the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan.
If
you don’t, the
oil
dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-13
When
to
Add
Oil
If
the oil is at
or
below the
ADD
line, then you’ll need
to
add at least one quart
of
oil.
But you must use the
right
kind.
This part explains what
kind
of
oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If
your engine has
so
much
oil
that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that
shows
the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
2.4L
Engine
6-14
What
Kind
of
Oil
to
Us
3100
Engine
The
2.4L
engine oil fill cap is located on the passenger’s
side
of
the engine. The
3100
engine oil fill cap is located
in front
of
the engine, behind the fan.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere
in
the
proper operating range. Push
the
dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Do
not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use
oil
that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for
you,
be sure the oil put
into your engine
is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline enrzines.
I
”
You
should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-15
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE
OILS
FOR
BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST-
-
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE
OIL
FOR
THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
LOOK
FOR
THIS
SYMBOL
IT\
“F
“C
i
+too-
-
t38
+80-
-
+27
+60-
-
+16
+40-
-
+4
+20---7
0---18
SAL
SW-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
DO
NOT
USE SAE
2OW-50
OR
ANY OTHER
GRADE
OIL
NOT RECOMMENDED
As
shown in the chart,
SAE
5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use
SAE
1OW-30 if it’s going
to be
0°F
(-
18
“C)
or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do
not use
other viscosity oils, such as
SAE
20W-50.
I
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to
use
the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM
Goodwrench@
oil
meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If
you are
in
an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F
(-29”C),
consider using either an
SAE
5W-30
synthetic oil or an
SAE
OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
6-16
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Oldsmobile retailer is
ready to advise if you think something should be added.
When
to
Change Engine Oil
If
any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
0
0
0
0
0
Most trips are less than
5
to 10 miles
(8
to
16
km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You
frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any
one
of
these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
or
3
months
--
whichever
occurs first.
If
none of them is true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500
miles (1 2
500
km)
or 12 months
--
whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with
a
fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
What to
Do
with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from
the
filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting
it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams
or
bodies
of
water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your retailer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-17
Air
C-
:aner
The air cleaner is located
on
the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
To
check or replace the air filter:
1.
Unscrew the four Phillips-head screws, then pull
the
cover back.
2.
Remove the air cleaner filter.
3.
Be sure to install the air cleaner filter and replace the
cover tightly.
Refer
to
the
Maintenance Schedule
to
determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner off
can cause you or others to be burned. The
air
cleaner not only cleans the
air,
it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working
on
the
engine with the air cleaner off.
NOTICE:
If
the air cleaner
is
off,
a
backfire can cause
a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage
it.
Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When
to
Check
and
Change
A
good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every
50,000
miles
(83
000
km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more
of
these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C)
or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If
you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”
in
the
Index.
How
to
Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose
to
have this done at your Oldsmobile retail
facility Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading
on
the dipstick.
I
NOTICE:
Too
much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle.
Too
much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be
sure to
get an accurate reading if
you
check
your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least
30
minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above
90°F
(32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic
--
especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
6-19
To
get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200"
F
(82°C
to
93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15
miles
(24
km)
when outside temperatures are above
50°F
(10°C).
If
it's colder than
50°F
(lO"C),
you may have
to drive 1Qnger.
the
Fluil
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in
PARK
(P).
With your foot
on
the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing
for
about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK
(P).
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting
off
the engine, follow these steps:
1.
The automatic transaxle dipstick handle
is
red.
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2.
Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull
it
back out again.
3.
Check both sides
of
the dipstick, and
read the lower
level.
The
fluid
level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4.
If
the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in
all
the way.
How
to
Add
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If
the fluid level is low, add
only
enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1.
Pull out the dipstick.
2.
Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5
L).
Don’t
oveflll.
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON@-111 is not covered by your
I
new vehicle warranty.
3.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under
“How
to Check.’’
4.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in
all
the way.
6-21
Manual
Transaxle
Fluid
When
to
Check
A
good time to have
it
checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transaxle
doesn’t require changing.
How
to
Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose
to
have this done at your Oldsmobile retail
facility Service Department.
E
you do it yourself, be sure
to
follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
I
NOTICE:
Too
much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle.
Too
much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall
on
hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Check
the
fluid level
only
when your engine is
off,
the
vehicle is parked
on
a level place and
the
transaxle is cool
enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transaxle
case.
Then, follow these steps:
1.
The manual transaxle dipstick handle is white and is
located behind the engine. Flip
the
handle up and
then pull
out
the dipstick and clean it with a
rag
or
paper towel.
2.
Push
it
back in all the way and remove it.
3.
Check both sides
of
the dipstick and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be between the
ADD
and
FULL marks. (Note: Fluid may appear at the bottom
of the dipstick even when the fluid level is several
pints low.)
4.
If
the fluid level is where it should be, push the
dipstick back in all the way and flip the handle
down.
If
the fluid level is low, add more fluid as
described in the next steps.
How
to
Add
Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind
of
fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1.
Remove the dipstick by flipping the handle
up
and
then pulling the dipstick out.
2.
Add fluid at the dipstick hole.
Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the FULL mark on the dipstick.
3.
Push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the
handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Hydraulic
Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir
is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It isn’t a good idea to “top
off’
your clutch fluid. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak.
A
fluid loss in this system could indicate
a
problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When
to
Check
and
What
to
Use
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine how
often you should check the
fluid level
in
your clutch
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper fluid.
See “Owner Checks
and Services” and
“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
How
to
Check
If
you can see fluid in the reservoir, the level is acceptable.
Engine
Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle
is
filled with
new DEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for
5
years or
150,000 miles (240
000
km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only DEX-COOL@ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating’’ in
the Index.
A
50150
mixture
of
water and the proper coolant for
your Oldsmobile will:
0
Give freezing protection down
to
-34°F
(-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to
265
“F
(129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only
DEX-COOL@
(silicate-free) coolant.
If
coolant is other than DEX-COOL@ is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000
miles
(50
000
km) or
24
months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of
coolant other than DEX-COOL’ is not
covered by our new vehicle warranty.
What
to
Use
Use a mixture of one-half
clean
water
(preferably
distilled) and one-half
DEX-COOL@
coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.
If
you
use
this mixture,
you don’t need
to
add anything else.
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use
a
50/50
mix
of
clean
water and DEX-COOL%oolant.
NOTICE:
If
you use an improper coolant mix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn't be covered
by
your
warranty.
Too
much water in the mix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If
you have to add coolant more than four times
a
yea,
have your retailer check your cooling system.
I
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don't have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking
Coolant
The surge tank is located
on
the passenger's side
of
the
engine compartment.
6-26
*N:
r
Turning
1
su
-e tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap
--
even a
little
--
when the engine and radiator are hot.
When your engine
is
cold, the coolant level should be at
the
FULL
COLD
mark.
If
the LOW COOLANT
light comes on,
it
means you’re low on
LOW
COOLANT
Adding Coolant
If
you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture
at the surge tank,
but only when the
engine is cool.
You
can be burned if
you
spill coolant
on
hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure
it
is tight.
Surge
Tank
Pressure
Cap
NOTICE:
~
Your pressure cap is
an
15
psi
(105
kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating.
When y'6u &place your surge tank pressure cap,
a
GM
cap is recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature
is
controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow
of
coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an
AC'
thermostat
is
recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
When
to
Check
Power Steering
Fluid
It
is
not necessary
to
regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there
is
a
leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.
A
fluid
loss
in this system
could indicate
a
problem. Have the system.inspected
and repaired.
How
To
Check Power Steering
Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the
top
of
the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the
C
mark.
If
necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What
to
Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind
of
fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.
Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
Windshield
Washer
Fluid
What
to
Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If
you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where
the
temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding
Washer
Fluid
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid
until
the
tank is
full.
6-29
.-
._
-
NOTICE:
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean
as
well
as
washer fluid.
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Fill your washer
fluid
tank only
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
Brakes
Brake
Fluid
H
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here.
It
is
filled
with
DOT-3
brake fluid.
6-30
There are only
two
reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system.
If
it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at
all.
So,
it isn’t a good idea to “top
off’
your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct
a
leak.
If
you add fluid
when your linings
are
worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.
You
should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done
on
the brake hydraulic system.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work
is
done on the brake
hydraulic system.
BRAKE
U.S.
Canada
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-31
When you do need brake fluid,
use
only
DOT-3
brake
fluid
--
such as Delco Supreme
11
@
(GM
Part
No.
12377967).
Use
new brake fluid from a sealed
container
only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This
will
help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
A
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at
all.
This could cause
a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
0
0
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just
a
few
drops of mineral-based oil, such
as
engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts
so
badly that they’ll have to
be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If
you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle.
If
you
do, wash it
off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
6-32
Your Oldsmobile has front disc brakes and rear
drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and
go
or be heard all the time your vehicle
is
moving (except
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
See “CaliperKnuckle Maintenance Inspection” in
Section
7
of this manual under Part
C
“Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
I
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to prevent
brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake
pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but
if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed
for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake
pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section
7
of this
manual under Part
C
“Periodic Maintenance
Inspections”.
Brake Pedal "ravel
See
your retailer
if
the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake
Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If
you
rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then
--
very carefully
--
make
a few moderate brake stops about every
1,000
miles
(1
600
km),
so
your brakes will adjust properly.
If
your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake
System
Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle
is
complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is
to
have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system
--
for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put
in
--
be sure
you get new approved
GM
replacement parts.
If
you
don't, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts
in
brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change
--
for the worse. The braking
performance you've come
to
expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
6-34
Battery
Every new Oldsmobile has a Delco Freedom@ battery.
You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle
Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for
25
days or more,
take
off
the black, negative
(-)
cable from the battery.
This
will help keep your battery from running down.
I
A
CAUTLN:
Contact your retailer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
This section describes bulb changing procedures
for
some
of
your interior and exterior lamps. For bulb sizes,
see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. For any bulbs not
listed in this section, contact your Pontiac dealer service
department.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode.
You
can be badly hurt
if
you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting”
in
the Index
for
tips on working around
a
battery without
getting hurt.
Halogen Bulbs
Halogen
bulbs
have pressuri,J gas inside and
can burst if
you
drop
or
scratch the bulb.
You
or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
,,,adlamp
Bulb
RepL,.nent
When replacing a halogen bulb, do not touch the glass
portion of the bulb. The oil from your fingers will
shorten the life
of
your new halogen bulb. For the type
of
bulb
to
use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
1.
On the driver’s side only, unscrew the butterfly
fasteners. Then lift the plate.
6-36
Both
Sides:
2.
Twist the lock ring clockwise one-sixth of a
turn
and
pull out the bulb assemblv.
3.
4.
r
His
d
Stc
L
1.
Use a flat screwdriver to gently release
the
trim
cover.
the tabs on
Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
Reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly and
headlamp housing.
2.
Using
a
flat screwdriver, remove the screws holding
the bulb assembly.
5.
Use a flat screwdriver to release the tabs holding the
socket in place.
4.
Gently remove
and
replace the bulbs.
5.
Reverse this procedure to reassemble the lamp.
Back-up Lamps
1.
Open the trunk lid
and
locate the back-up lamps on
the inside
of
the lid.
2.
Gently remove the bulbs from the socket.
3.
Replace the bulb in
the
socket.
4.
Close the trunk lid.
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
For
the
type of bulb
to
use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index.
1.
Pull back the trunk trim.
2.
Carefully pull tab
A
of the plastic taillamp bracket
away from the center of the trunk, then forward.
When the bracket releases from its mount, pull the
taillamp assembly forward.
6-38
omeLa
3.
Wiggle the bulb out
of
the
socket.
4.
Replace the bulb.
5.
Reverse the steps to reassemble the taillamp,
stoplamp
or
rear turn signal lamp.
To change your dome lamp bulb, grasp the center rront
and center rear portion
of
the housing and squeeze
firmly but gently. The housing should pop
off.
If
this doesn’t work, you may need
to
use a small
flat-head screwdriver under the side
of
the housing to
help pry
it
off.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires
Your new Oldsmobile comes with high-quality tires maae
by a leading tire manufacturer.
If
you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Oldsmobile
Warranty
booklet for details.
Replacement blades come
in
different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the
type with a release clip:
1.
Pull the windshield wiper
am
away from the windshield.
2.
Lift the release clip with a screwdriver and pull the
blade assembly off the wiper arm.
3.
Push the new wiper blade securely onto the wiper arm.
For
proper size and type, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result
of
too much friction.
You
could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading
Your
Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
I
6-40
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
cut, punctured or broken
by
a
sudden
impact
--
such as when you hit
a
pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If
your
tread is badly worn, or
if
your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
The Tire-Loading Information label, which
is
on the
rear edge of the driver’s door shows the correct inflation
pressures
for
your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than
1
mile
(1.6
km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right.
It’s
1
don’t have enough air (under
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
lot.
If
your tires
,inflation), you can
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
0
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60
psi
(420
Pa).
How
to
Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping
out
dirt
and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
6,000
to
8,000
miles
(
10
000
to
13
000
km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later
in
this section for more information.
The purpose
of
regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-42
Don’t include the compact spare tire
in
your tire rotation.
[t’s Time
for
New
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown
on
the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
I
Rust or dirt on
a
wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after
a
time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When
you
change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use
a
cloth or
a
paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use
a
scraper or wire brush later,
if
you
need to,
to
get all the rust or dirt off. (See
“Changing
a
Flat Tire” in the Index.)
kc
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is
to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only
1/16
inch
(1.6
mm)
or
less of tread remaining.
You
need
a
new tire
if
any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
The tread
or
sidewall is cracked, cut
or
snagged deep
tire’s rubber.
enough to show cord
or
fabric.
0
The
tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because
of
the size or location
of
the damage.
6-43
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look
at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when
it
was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When
you
get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS”
(for mud and snow).
If
you ever replace your tires with those not having
a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
CAUTION: (Continued)
I
CAUTION: (Continuc
handle properly, and you could have a cradh.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
thowh-
Tt
was developed for use on your vehicle.
- -
Jniform
I
11
lit
A
The following information relates to the system developed
by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction
and temperature performance.
(This
applies only
to
vehicles sold
in
the United States.) The grades are molded
on the sidewalls
of
most passenger car tires. The Uniform
Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of
10
to
12
inches
(25
to
30
cm), or to some limited-production tires.
1
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded
150
would wear
one
and a half
(1
1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use,
however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
--
A,
B,
C
The traction grades,
from
highest
to
lowest, are
A,
B,
and
C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A
tire marked
C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
--
A,
B,
C
The temperature grades are
A
(the highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade
C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent higher levels
of
performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel
Alignment
and
Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling
one
way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
6-45
Wheel
Replacement
Replace any wheel that
is
bent, cracked,
or
badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should
be
replaced.
If
the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
Oldsmobile retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your
retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need
to
replace any
of
your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM
original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Oldsmobile model.
c
a
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air
and make you lose control. You could have
a
collision in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
I
NOTICE:
~~
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
6-46
Used Replacement Wheels
Putting
a
used wheel
on
your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.
It
could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace
a
wheel, use
a
new
GM
original equipment wheel.
Tire
Chains
~.
~~ ~
NOTICE:
If
your Oldsmobile has
P195/65R15
size tires,
don’t use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions.
To
help avoid damage
to
your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will
fit,
install
them on the front tires.
6-47
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if
you
strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if
you
breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
Oldsmobile, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never
use these to clean your vehicle:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous
--
some more than
others
--
and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside
of
Your
Oldsmobile
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your Oldsmobile retailer has two cleaners, a
solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered
cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well.
Do
not use them
on
vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
2.
Clean up stains as soon as you can
--
before they set.
3.
Use
a
clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A
soft
brush may be used if
stains
are
stubborn.
4.
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you
use
them, don’t saturate the stained area.
5.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Mix
Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on the container label.
Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
As
soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
Wipe
off
what’s
left
with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
Dry it immediately with
a
blow dryer.
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-The
Cleaner
on Fabric
First, see if you nave
to
use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
If
you need to use a solvent:
1.
Gently scrape excess soil from
the
trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper.
2.
3.
4.
Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the
outside
of
the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
Keep changing to a clean section
of
the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent
a
cleaning ring.
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy
or
Oily
Stains
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2.
Follow the solvent-type instructions
described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if
left
on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed as
soon
as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will
dissolve them and may cause them to smead.
Non-Greasy Stains
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if
you
don’t get them
off
quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinylAeather cleaner. See your retailer for this product.
be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape
off
excess stain, then sponge the
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with
a
soft cloth. Then, let the
soiled area with cool water.
2.
If
a Stain remains, follow the foam-type inStrUCtiOnS leather dry naturally.
D~
not use heat
to
dry.
described earlier.
3.
If
an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1
teaspoon
(5
ml) of baking soda to
1
cup
(250
ml)
of lukewarm water.
4.
If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2.
Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
3.
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with
a
clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
retailer for this product.
Never
use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately.
If
dirt
is
allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the
Top
of
the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make
it
difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
6-50
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
I
PL
CAUTION:
Do
not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part
No.
1050427)
or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause
scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window,
since they may have to be scraped
off
later.
If
abrasive
cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric
defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license
should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside
of
the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is
not
clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with
GM
Windshield
Cleaner, Bon
A.mi@
Powder (non-scratching glass cleaning
powder), GM
Part
No.
105001
1.
The windshield is clean if beads do not
form
when you
rinse if with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace worn blades.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required.
(See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.)
6-f’
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Oldsmobile
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of
color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing
Your
Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s f~sh is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t
use strong soaps or chemical detergents.
Use
liquid hand,
dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use
cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid
or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly
and not allowed to
dry
on
the
surface, or
they
could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure
car
washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
Oldsmobile by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish.
You
can get GM-approved
cleaning products from your retailer. (See “Appearance
Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Your Oldsmobile has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.
Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and
made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding
or
aggressive polishing on
a
basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish
or
leave swirl marks.
6-52
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your Oldsmobile garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If
Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A
wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through
an
automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
I
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body
or
wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
6-53
Sheet Metal Damage
If
your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your retailer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect
on
the underbody.
If
these
are
not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts
such
as
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean
any
areas where mud
and other debris can collect.
Dirt
packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This
damage can
take two
forms:
blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and
small irregular dark spots etched into
the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Oldsmobile will repair, at no charge to the owner,
the surfaces
of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20
000
km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
6-54
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NUMBER
USAGE
DESCRIPTION
SIZE
994954
Exterior Polish
Polishing Cloth
-
Wax Treated
23
in.
x 25 in.
1050004
Spot and stain removal
Vinyl Cleaner 32
oz.
(0.946
L)
1050214
Exterior cleaner and polish Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish
1
gal. (3.785
L)
1050200
Removes soil
and
black marks White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
16
oz.
(0.473 L) 1050174
Removes rust and corrosion Chrome Cleaner and Polish 16
oz.
(0.473 L)
1050173
Also removes old waxes and polishes
Tar and Road Oil Remover
16
oz.
(0.473
L)
1050 172
Shines vehicle without scratching Chamois 2.75
sq.
ft.
I
I
I
1050427
I
23
oz.
(0.680
L)
1
Glass Cleaner Cleans grease, grime and smoke
film
1052870 16
oz.
(0.473
L)
Wash and Wax Concentrate Exterior wash
1052918**
8
oz.
(0.237
L)
Armor All
n4
Protector
Protects vinyl, leather and rubber
1052925
16
oz.
(0.473
L)
Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner Cleans
vinyl,
cloth, tires and mats
1052929 16
oz.
(0.473
L)
Wheel Cleaner
Spray on wheel cleaner
1052930
8
oz.
(0.237
L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Attracts and absorbs soils
12345002**
16
oz.
(0.473
L)
Armor All
TM
Cleaner
Cleans
vinyl,
leather and rubber
12345725 12
oz.
(0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine Shines tires
12377964 16
oz.
(0.473
L)
Cleaning
Wax
Protects finish and removes fine scratches
I
I
-
I
12377966
I
16
oz.
(0.473 L)
I
Finish Enhancer
I
Spot cleans paint and gives high luster
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**
Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
I
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-55
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
c
i
bl
SAMPLE4UXVM072675
kd
I1
This is the legal identifier for your Oldsmobile. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument
panel, on the driver’s side.
You
can see it
if
you look
through the windshield from outside your vehicle.
The VIN also appears
on
the Vehicle Certification
and Service Parts labels and the certificates
of
title
and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN
is
the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts
T
-entification Label
You’ll find this label on the bottom
of
your spare. tire
cover. It’s very helpful
if
you ever need to order parts.
On this label
is:
0
your VIN,
0
the model designation,
0
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label
is
not removed from
the
vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
--
Don’t add anything electrical to your Oldsmobile
unless you check with your retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has
an
air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical
to
your Oldsmobile, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Oldsmobile”
in
the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring
is
protected by a circuit breaker in
the fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to
go
on
and
off,
or in some cases
to
remain off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse.
If
the motor overheats due
to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload
is
caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is
too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses
and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by
a
combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This
greatly reduces the chance
of
fires caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with
a
new one
of
the identical size
and rating.
If
you ever have
a
problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle that you
can get along without
--
like the radio or cigarette
lighter
--
and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace
it
as
soon
as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the
instrument panel fuse block
and
the engine compartment
fuse block.
Instrument
Panel
Fuse
Block
I
The
main
fuse panel
is
located
on
the left side of the
instrument panel.
To
access the fuses, open the fuse
panel door.
Fuse Usage
PWR WDO Power Window (Circuit Breaker)
TURN Turn Signal Lamps
INT LPS Alarm Module (Illuminated Entry,
Warning Chimes, Overhead Lamps,
MapReading Lamps, Glove
Box
Lamp, Trunk Lamp, Radio,
Power Mirrors), Anti-Lock Brakes,
Variable Effort Steering
Fuse
PWR ST
RDO IGN
HTR-A/C
CRUISE
TAIL LPS
LTR
WIPER
02
DR UNLK
ALARM
Usage
Power Seat
Radio
Heater/Air Conditioning Blower,
Daytime Running Lamps, Automatic
Lamp Control
Cruise Control
Parking Lamps, Taillamps,
Sidemarker Lamps, License Lamps,
Instrument Panel Lights, Underhood
Lamp, Headlamp Warning Alarm
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlet
Windshield Wipers/Washers
Heated Oxygen Sensors
Automatic Door Unlock
Automatic Transaxle, Automatic Door
Unlock, Alarm Module (Illuminated
Entry, Warning Chimes), Traction
Telltale, Rear Window Defogger,
Remote Lock Control
Fuse
FOG/FTP
PRNDL
DR LK
2
AIR BAG
HORN
INST
STOP HAZ
PCM
DR LK
1
INST LPS
RR DEF
HDLP
Usage
Fog Lamps
Instrument Cluster, Powertrain
Computer, Park-Lock Solenoid,
Electronic PRNDL
Door Locks
Air Bag-Power
Horn, Service Tool Power
Instrument Cluster
Stoplamps, Hazard Lamps,
Anti-Lock Brakes
Powertrain Control Module
Door Locks, Remote Lock Control
Instrument Panel Lights, Fog Lamps
Rear Window Defogger
Headlamps, Daytime Running Lamps
(Circuit Breaker)
Engine
Compartment
Fuse
Block
Fuse
F/P,
INJ
ERLS
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
ABS
Usage
Fuel Pump, Fuel Injectors
Back-up Lamps, Canister
Purge Valve, EGR,
Automatic Transaxle,
Brake-Transaxle Shift
Interlock, Anti-Lock Brakes,
Variable Effort Steering, Air
Conditioning Compressor,
Park Lock Solenoid
Anti-Lock Brake Solenoids,
Variable Effort Steering
6-60
Fuse
IGN MOD
HVAC BLO MOT
PCM BATT
CLG FAN
HDLP
STOP
LPS
PWR
ACC
RR
DEFG
ABS
IGN
SW
Usage
Ignition System
Heater/ Air Conditioner-High
Blower, Generator-Voltage
Sense
Powertrain Computer
Engine Cooling Fan
Lighting Circuits
Power Accessory,
Stoplamp Circuits,
Rear Window Defogger
Anti-Lock Brakes,
Variable
Effort
Steering
Ignition Switched Circuits
Replacement
Bulbs
Outside
Lamps
Bulb
Headlamp
..............................
9004
Back-up
...............................
2057
High Level Stop
..........................
912
Tail/Stop/Turn
..........................
3057
Inside
Lamps
Bulb
Dome
..................................
562
6-61
-
.
-
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Crankcase
2.4L Engine
....................
4
quarts (3.8 L)
3 100 Engine
..................
4.5 quarts (4.3
L)
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement
...
7.4 quarts
(7.0
L)
After Complete Overhaul
.......
10.0
quarts (9.5 L)
When draining or replacing torque converter, more
fluid may be needed.
Cooling System
2.4LEngine
.................
11.3 quarts (10.7 L)
3100Engine
................
13.6 quarts (12.9 L)
Refrigerant,
Air Conditioning
.........
See refrigerant charge
label under the hood.
Fuel Tank
.................
15.2 gallons
(57.5
L)
Tire Pressures, Sizes
...........
See Tire-Loading
Information label on
driver’s door.
Wheel Nut Torque
..........
100
lb-ft
(140
N-m)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in
this manual. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
2.4L
Engine Specifications
VINEngineCode
...........................
T
Type
....................................
L4
Displacement
........................
2.4 Liters
Firing Order
..........................
1-3-4-2
Thermostat Temperature
...........
180
OF
(82
O
C)
Horsepower
.............................
150
3100
Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code
...........................
M
Type
....................................
V6
Displacement
........................
3.1 Liters
Firing Order
......................
1-2-3-4-5-6
Horsepower
.............................
155
Thermostat Temperature
...........
195°F
(9 1 “C)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If
the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If you’re not sure, ask your Oldsmobile retailer.
6-62
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Element
2.4L
.......................
AC Type A- 1233C
3100
.......................
ACTypeA-1233C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L
..........................
AC Type PF-44
3100
..........................
ACTypePF-47
Spark
Plugs
2.4L
...........
AC Type
04
1-9 10 (Platinum Plug)
Gap:
0.060
inch (1.52 mm)
3 100
...........
AC Type 041-940 (Platinum Plug)
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
......
19 inches (48 cm)
Dimensions
Length
Coupe
................
187.9 inches (477.1 cm)
Sedan
.................
1
87.9 inches (477.2 cm)
Coupe
.................
74.1 inches (188.2 cm)
Sedan
..................
74.1 inches (188.2 cm)
Coupe
.................
53.5 inches (135.9 cm)
Sedan
..................
53.5 inches (135.9 cm)
Coupe
................
103.4 inches (262.7 cm)
Sedan
.................
103.4 inches (262.7 cm)
Coupe
.................
55.8 inches
(
14 1.7 cm)
Sedan
..................
55.8 inches (141.7 cm)
Coupe
.................
55.3 inches
(
140.4
cm)
Sedan
..................
55.3 inches (140.4 cm)
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Front Tread
Rear Tread
b%
NOTES
6-64
Section
7
Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your Oldsmobile. Your vehicle needs these services
to
retain its
safety, dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-4
1
7-4
1
7-4
1
7-42
7-42
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Selecting the Right Schedule
Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
At Least Twice a Year
At Least Once a Year
7-45
7-45
Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
7-45
Exhaust System Inspection
7-45 Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
7-45 Throttle Linkage Inspection
7-46 Brake System Inspection
7-46 Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection
7-47 Part
D:
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Part
E:
Maintenance Record
7-49
7-1
--”
IMPORTANT.
KEEP
ENGINE
OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL
AND
CHANGE
RECOMMENDED
AS
I
Have
you
purchased the
GM
Protection Plan?
The
Plan
supplements your
new
vehicle warranties. See your-
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or
yoru-
Oldsmobile retailer- for details.
Introduction
Your
Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality
of
the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.
To
help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle
in
good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
7-2
How
~ ~
1
Section
is
Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex,
so
unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your retailer’s service department or another
qualified service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on
a
vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured.
Do
your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the
job.
If
you have any doubt, have
a
qualified
technician do the work.
“Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your Oldsmobile retailer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some products
GM
recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
(‘Part
E:
Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write
it
down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition,
it
is
a
good
idea
to
keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If
you
are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information
GM
publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications’’
in
the Index.
7-3
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because
of
all the different ways people use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section.
So
please read this
section and note how you drive.
If
you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Oldsmobile retailer.
This part tells
you
the maintenance services you should
have done
and
when you should schedule them.
If
you
go
to
your retailer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine
GM
parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use
are
listed
in
Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you
or
anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
driving limits.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which
of
the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
7-4.
.
._
Maintenance Schedule
[
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one
of
these conditions is true for your vehicle:
0
0
0
0
0
Most trips are less than
5
to 10 miles
(8
to
16
km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips
are
through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle. (With some models, you should never
tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.)
If
the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One
of
the reasons you should
follow
this sch.edule if
you operate your vehicle under any
of
these conditions
is
that
these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
I
i
I
Short
Trip/City Intervals
Every
3,000
Miles
(5
000
km):
Engine Oil and Filter
Every 6,000 Miles
(10
000
km):
Chassis Lubrication
Every 15,000 Miles
(25
000
km):
Air Cleaner Filter
Every
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km):
Air Cleaner Filter
Change (or
3
months, whichever occurs first).
(or
6
months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Inspection,
if
driving in dusty conditions.
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every
50,000
Miles
(83
000
km):
Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every
60,000
Miles (100
000
km):
Engine Accessory
Every 100,000 Miles (166
000
km):
Spark Plug Wire
Every
150,000
Miles
(240
000
km):
Cooling System
These intervals
only
summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to
follow
the complete maintenance schedule
on
tlze,following pages.
Drive Belt Inspection.
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Service (or every
60
months, whichever occurs first).
Maintenance Schedule
~~~~~~
I
Long TriplHighway Definition
Follow this maintenance schedule
only
if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true.
Do
not use this schedule if the vehicle
is
used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the
Short
Trip/City schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a
fully
warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil
to
break
down slower.
I
Long
TrzH
Every
7,500
Miles
(12
500
km):
Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every
12
months, whichever
occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km):
Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every
50,000
Miles
(83
000
km):
Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100
000
km):
Engine Accessory
Every 100,000 Miles (166
000
km):
Spark Plug Wire
Every 150,000 Miles
(240
000
km):
Cooling System
These intervals
only
summarize maintenance services.
Be sure
to
follow the complete maintenance schedule
on
the.foIlowing pages.
Drive Belt Inspection.
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Service (or every
60
months, whichever occurs first).
7-6
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166
000
km)
should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166
000
km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at
150,000
miles
(240
000
km) should be performed at
the same interval after
150,000
miles
(240
000
km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
?
The
U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the
failure
to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion
of
the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and
the
maintenance
be recorded.
#
Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage.
+
A
good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in Part C
of
this schedule.
++
If
you drive
in
a highly corrosive environment, your
brake calipers may require additional inspection and
service, at every other tire rotation. See “CaliperKnuckle
Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections”
in
Part C
of
this schedule.
7-7
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
3,000
Miles
(5
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY:
6,000
Miles
(10
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter
(or
every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
17
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-8
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
9,000
Miles
(15
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
12,000
Miles
(20
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see footnote
++.)
DATE SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
7-9
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance SchedTl
15,000
Miles
(25
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
Inspect air cleaner filter
if
you
are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE SERVICED
BY:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
18,000
Miles
(30
000
km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Corztrol
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation”
in
the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
1
DATE
1
ACTUALMILEAGE
1-
SERVICED
BY:
7-10
I
Short
Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
21,000
Miles
(35 000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Contr-01
Service.
E-
l
1
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
24,000
Miles
(40
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see footnote
++.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
I
7-11
27,000
Miles
(45
000
km)
0
Change engine
oil
and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
I
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control Service.
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
0
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emissior? Control Service.
(See footnote?
.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE SERVICED
BY:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
33,000
Miles
(55
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
7-13
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
36,000
Miles
(60
000
km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index
for
proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
I
39,000
Miles
(65
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-14
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
42,000
Miles
(70
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
45,000
Miles
(75
000
km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-15
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
48,000
Miles
(80
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation”
in
the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
1
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED
BY:
I
50,000
Miles
(83
000
km)
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more
of
these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90
OF
(32°C) or higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
7-16
I
Short
Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If
you
do
not use your vehicle under any
of
these
conditions, the fluid andfilter do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
I
51,000
Miles
(85
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance
Schedule
I
54,000
Miles
(90
000
km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
57,000
Miles
(95
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
60,000
Miles
(100
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
[7
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
17
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control Service.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
El
Inspect
fi
le1 tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see
footnote
++.)
fl
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
7-19
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
63,000
Miles
(105
000
km)
El
Change engine
oil
and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY
I
66,000
Miles
(110
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components
(or
every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BYI
7-20
1
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
69,000
Miles
(115
000
km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control
Service.
DATE
SERVICED
BY:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
72,000
Miles
(120 000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
I
I
I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
7-21
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
75,000
Miles
(125
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
I
I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
78,000
Miles
(130 000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY.
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
81,000
Miles
(135
000
km)
1
84,000
Miles
(140
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control
Service.
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
,
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires.
See
“Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see
footnote
++.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-23
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
87,000
Miles
(145
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
I
I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
__i
SERVICED
BY
90,000
Miles
(150
000
km)
17
Change engine oil and filter
(or
every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Replace
air
cleaner filter.
An Enzission Control Service.
7-24
Short
Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
0
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission
Control
Service.
(See footnote?.)
I7
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
3
SERVICED
BY
93,000
Miles
(155
000
km)
Change engine
oil
and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission
Control
Service.
DATE SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-25
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
96,000
Miles
(160
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter
(or
every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index
for
proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
ISERYICED
BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
99,000
Miles
(165
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
t
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
I
I
100,000
Miles
(166
000
km)
0
Inspect spark plug wires (except
2.4L
Code
0
Replace spark plugs.
T
engine).
An
Emission Control Service.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90
OF
(32
O
C)
or higher.
(Continued)
n
An
I
Short
Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
100,000
Miles
(I66
000
km)
(Continued)
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If
you do not use your vehicle under any
of
these
conditions, thefluid andfilter
do
not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
150,000
Miles
(240 000
km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every
60
months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An
Emission
Control Service.
7-28
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166
000
km)
should be performed after
100,000
miles
(166
000
km)
at the same intervals. The services shown
at
150,000
miles
(240
000
km)
should be performed at
the same interval after
150,000
miles
(240
000
km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The
U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
or
the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform
this
maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
#
Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage.
+
A
good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C
of
this schedule.
++
If
you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your
brake calipers may require additional inspection and
service, at every other tire rotation. See ‘‘Caliperfiuckle
Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in Part C of
this
schedule.
7-29
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
7,500
Miles
(12
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
i
SERVICED
BY
15,000
Miles
(25
000
km)
0
Change engine
oil
and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An
Enzissior~
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
I
I
I
1
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
7-30
22,500
Miles
(37
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
An
Emission
Control
Service.
DATE
I
1
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission
Control
Senrice.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see footnote
++.)
(Continued)
7-31
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km)
(Continued)
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control Service.
El
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or
leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
n
37,500
Miles
(62
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation”
in
the
Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
I
45,000
Miles
(75
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation”
in
the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
An
Emission
Control
Service.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
1
50,000
Miles
(83
000
km)
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90
OF
(32
O
C) or higher.
(Continued)
n
mm
1
Long TriplHighway Maintenance
Schedule
50,000
Miles
(83 000
km)
(Continued)
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found
in
taxi, police or
If
you
do
not use your vehicle under any
of
these
conditions, the fluid andfilter do not require changing
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
delivery service.
I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
SERVICED
BY:
52,500
Miles
(87
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
0
Lubricate chassis components
(or
every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
An
Emission Control Service.
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY:
7-34
1
Long
Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
60,000
Miles
(100
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also see footnote
++.)
0
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control! Service.
0
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect
fuel
cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
7-35
-kg
Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
I
..
.
67,500
Miles
(112
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
AII
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rota
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
.tion
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
i
75,000
Miles
(125
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see footnote
++.)
~~
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED
BY1
7-36
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
82,500
Miles
(137
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation”
in
the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
7-37
1
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance
Schedule
90,000
Miles
(150
000
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
17
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12
months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
(See footnote?.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
(Also
see
footnote
++.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY:
7-38
97,500
Miles
(162
500
km)
0
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote
#.)
0
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote
+.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE lSERYICED
BY
I
100,000
Miles
(166
000
km)
0
Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code
Replace spark plugs.
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle
is
mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
T engine).
An
Emission Control Service.
An Enzission Control Service.
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90
OF
(32
O
C) or higher.
(Continued)
7-39
LUII~
Trip/High\
LY
Maintenance Schedule
100,000
--Xes
(1
66
000
km)
(Continued)
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
wing.
-
When doing frequent trailer to
-
Uses such as found in taxi, pol
delivery service.
ice or
If
you
do not use your vehicle under any
of
these
conditions, the.fluid and.filtep. do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
I
1
I
I
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
150,000
Miles
(240
000
km)
0
Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every
60
months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
An
En.zissiol.2 Control Service.
DATE
SERVICED
BY
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-40
Part
B:
Owner Checks and
Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants
are
added to your
vehicle, make sure
they
are the proper ones, as shown in
Part
D.
At Each
Fuel
Fill
It
is
important
for
you
or
a
service station attendant
to
perform these underhood checks at
each
fuel
fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant’’ in the
Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add
the
proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”
in
the Index
for further details.
At
Least
Once
a
Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50
hours
of
tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
7-41
At
Least Twice
a
Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in
the
Index.
Manual Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transaxle”
in
the Index. Check for leaks. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and
repaired if needed.
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
A
fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if
needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss
in
this system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part
D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, trunk lid,
glove box door and console door. Part
D
tells you what
to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-42
Starter Switch Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
2.
Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
around the vehicle.
Brake”
in
the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE:
Do
not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3.
On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N).
If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL
(N),
push the clutch down halfway and
try to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch
is
pushed down all the way to the
floor.
If
the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transaxle)
I
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked
on
a
level surface.
2.
Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in
the Index if necessary).
NOTE:
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately
if
the vehicle begins to move.
3.
With the engine off, turn the key
to
the RUN
position, but don’t start
the
engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s
BTSI
needs service.
7-43
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK
only when the shift lever is in
PARK
(P).
With a manual transaxle, the key should
turn
to LOCK
only
when the shift lever
is
in REVERSE (R).
On vehicles with
a
key release button, try to turn the key
to
LOCK
without pressing the button. The key should
turn to
LOCK
only when
you
press the key button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only
in
LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
PARK
(P)
Mechanism Check
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin
to
move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there
is
room in front
of
your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot
on
the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
0
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal.
Do
this until the vehicle is held
by
the parking
brake only.
To
check the PARK
(P)
mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK
(P).
Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At
least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-44
Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your GM retailer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a
GM
service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear
or
lack
of
lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the
floor
pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust’’ in
the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding,
and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort
or
excessive wear.
Do
not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
7-45
Brake
System
Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. The
parking brake is self-adjusting
and
no manual
adjustment is required. You
may
need to have your
brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
CalipedKnuckle Maintenance Inspection
If you operate your vehicle
in
a
highly corrosive
environment, as indicated
by
the shaded areas on the
map following this text, your vehicle may require
additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate
GM
Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection
procedure.
As
necessary, caliper pins and knuckle brake
pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire
rotation. Also, see your
GM
retailer’s service
department or qualified service center for
additional information.
7-46
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM retailer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
~~
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50
mixture
of
clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@
or Havoline@ DEX-COOL@
coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
GM Part
No.
3634621 or
equivalent with a complete flush
and refill.
USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
Hydraulic Clutch
System
Power Steering
System
Manual
Transaxle
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Manual
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11
@
Brake Fluid
(GM
Part
No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part
No.
1052884
-
1 pint,
105001
7
-
1 quart, or equivalent).
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part
No.
12345349
or equivalent).
DEXRON@-111 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part
No.
1234624
1
or equivalent).
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No.
12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI
#
2,
Category
LB
or GC-LB.
USAGE
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
I
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine oil.
GM Optikleen’ Washer Solvent
(GM Part
No.
lOSlSlS)
or equivalent.
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part
No.
12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements
of
NLGI
##
2,
Categorv
LB
or
GC-LB.
FLUID/LUBRICANT
I
Hood and Door
or equivalent).
(GM
Part
No.
12346241
Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@
Weatherstrip
Part
No.
12345579 or equivalent).
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
See “Replacement Parts’’ in the Index for recommended
replacement filters and spark plugs.
7-48
Part
E:
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record
the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance’’ can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is
a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
SERVICED
BY
READING
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE READING SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-50
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
7-51
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
READING
I
SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-52
Section
8
Customer Assistance Information
Here
you
will find out how to contact Oldsmobile if you need assistance. This section also tells
you
how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance
for
Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance Program
Features and Benefits
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
Warranty Information
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Oldsmobile retailers have the Fdcilities, trained
technicians and up-to-date information
to
promptly
address any concerns you may have. However,
if
a
concern has not been resolved to your complete
satisfaction, take the following steps:
STEP
ONE
--
Discuss your concern with a member
of
retail facility management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level.
If
the matter has already
been reviewed with the Sales, Service or Parts Manager,
contact the owner
of
the retail facility or the
General Manager.
8-2
STEP
TWO
--
If after contacting a member
of
retail facility management,
it
appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the retail facility without further
help, contact the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance
Network by calling 1-800-442-6537. In Canada,
contact
GM
of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside
of
the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico:
(525)
625-3256
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English)
or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
0
In the US. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
0
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)
0
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1
-
800-534-0 122
0
In all other Caribbean countries:
(809)
763-13
15
0
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at: (905) 644-4112.
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available
to
give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
0
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Retail facility name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
0
Nature
of
concern
We encourage
you
to call
us
so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Oldsmobile, address your inquiry to:
Customer Assistance Representative
Oldsmobile Central Office
920
Townsend Street
P.O.
Box 30095
Lansing,
MI
48909
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
LlH
8P7
Refer to your
Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for addresses
of
GM
Overseas offices.
When contacting Oldsmobile, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the retail facility,
using the retailer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That
is
why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
Customer Assistance
for
Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard
of
hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Oldsmobile has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user
can communicate with Oldsmobile by dialing:
1-800-833-OLDS. (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance
Program Features and Benefits
The Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance program means
help is just a toll-free call away
--
24 hours a day,
365
days a year.
Courteous and capable Customer Assistance Advisors
are on-call to provide you with prompt assistance.
24-Hour
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance
Telephone Number
1-800-442-OLDS
(6537)
is the one number to call
for assistance
in
the United States. Trained Customer
Assistance Advisors, on-call to render assistance to
Oldsmobile drivers, can dispatch roadside assistance
and towing service, locate the nearest Oldsmobile
retail facility, take your request for an Oldsmobile
computerized trip routing or simply answer any
questions the Oldsmobile driver may have about the
coverage provided by your Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance Program. The Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance number is fully staffed and operational
24 hours a day,
365
days a year.
8-5
Who
Is
Covered?
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance covers all
1997 Oldsmobile vehicles.*
Coverage is for the Oldsmobile vehicle,
regardless
of
the driver,
and is concurrent with the Bumper
to
Bumper
warranty period.
Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when in
Oldsmobile’s judgement the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Vehicles sold in Canada have a separate roadside
assistance program, as described next in this section.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada
or
the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the retailer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Courtesy Transportation
We’re here to help. That’s why whenever your
Oldsmobile is undergoing any Bumper to Bumper
Warranty service, we’ll make sure you don’t end
up stranded at the retail facility. It’s called Courtesy
Transportation and it’s our way
to
make sure you’re
able to get out even when your car
is
in. For same-day
service, we’ll give you a one-way shuttle ride of up
to 10 miles
(16
km).
If
your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs,
we’ll
provide a loaner car or
reimburse you up to
$30
a day for the cost of alternate
transportation
--
a cab, a bus or even a rental car
if
necessary. Having your car serviced is rarely
convenient, but with Courtesy Transportation, at
least you’ll be able to get where you need to go,
whether it’s here,
or
there.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical
to rent vehicles to people under 21 years
of
age.
If
you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a
vehicle, Oldsmobile will reimburse up to $30/day
for documented transportation you receive. Please
consult your retailer for details.
For warranty repairs during
the
Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
retailer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
In
Canada,
please consult your
GM
dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM
Participation
in
an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all
50
states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet. General
Motors reserves the right
to
change eligibility
limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in
this program.
Both Oldsmobile and your Oldsmobile retailer are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that,
if
a
situation arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier
in
this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs
or
interpretation
of
the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
To
assist in resolving these
disagreements, Oldsmobile voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO
LINE.
BBB AUTO
LINE
is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease
a
GM
vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO
LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200
Wilson Boulevard
Suite
800
Arlington,
VA
22203-
1804
Telephone:
1-800-955-5100
To
file
a claim, you will be asked to provide
your
name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature
of
your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO
LINE,
but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary.
If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case
to
an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The
arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision,
GM
will be
bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about
40
days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with
a
state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Oldsmobile Customer
Assistance Network at 1-800-442-6537.
Warranty
Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING
SAFETY
DEFECTS
TO
THE
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and
if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group
of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your retailer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA,
you
may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA,
U.S.
Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C.
20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-8
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write
to:
Transport Canada
Box
8880
Ottawa, Ontario
K
1
G 3 52
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO
GENERAL
MOTORS
In addition to notifying
NHTSA
(or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-442-6537 or write:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Network
P.O. Box 30095
Lansing, MI 48909
In
Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors
of
Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering
Service
and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
1997
OLDSMOBILE SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of
your
vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or
credit card information
to
Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
~~
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR
1997
OLDSMOBILE
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997
GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to
assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O.
Box
07130
Detroit,
MI
48207
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$1
5.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$1
0.00
CURRENT
&
PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available
for
current and past
model
GM
vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM
-
6:OO
PM Eastern
Tme
For Credit Card
Orders
Only (VISA-Mastercard-Discover)
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE:
For
Credit
Card
Holders
Only)
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM
-
6:OO
PM
EST)
FAX Orders Only
1-31
3-865-5927
1
-800-782-4356
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service.
If
further Information
is
needed, wrlte
to
the address
s
a
own below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without,packing slip with return
information withln 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stockma fee may be applied
against the original order.
1-
-
PUBLICATION FORM
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHIC
QTY.
EACH*
PRICE TOTAL
NUMBER NAME YEAR PRICE
Service Manual 1997 $90.00
Car
&
Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1997 $40.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1997
$1
5.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1997
$1
0.00
1
9
9
7
G
M
I
S
H
I
P
NOTE:
Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form
to:
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O.
Box
07130
Detroit, MI
48207
(CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION)
T
0
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O.
BOX
NUMBERS)
(CITY) (STATE) (ZIP CODE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
0
AREA CODE
GM-OLD-ORD97 *(Prices are subject
to
change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc.
(USA
funds
only
-
do
not
send
cash.)
0
Mastercard
0
VISA
Discover
Michigan Purchasers
add
6%
sales tax
U.S.
Order Processing
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
I
GRAND TOTAL
I
-
Note to Canadian Customers:
All
listed prices are quoted in
US.
funds. Canadian residents
are
to
make checks payable in
US.
funds.
To
cover Canadian postage, add
$11.50
plus the
U.S.
order processing.
Account
Number:
Expiration
m
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
fi
NOTES
8-12
Section
9
Index
Accessory Power Outlet
.........
.......
2-54
AirBag
.....................................
1-21
How
Does it Restrain
..........................
1-25
How it Works
......
...
............
1-23
Location
....................................
1-23
Readiness Light
.........................
1-22, 2-6 1
Servicing
...................................
1-26
What Makes it Inflate
..........................
1-24
What Will
You
See After it Inflates
...............
1-25
When Should it Inflate
.........................
1-24
Aircleaner
....................................
6-18
Air Conditioning
................................
3-3
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
.....................
6-62
Alignment and Balance, Tire
...
................
6-46
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning
...
..............
6-53
Antifreeze
.....................................
6-24
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light
................
2-63, 4-7
Brakes
......................................
4-7
Anti-Theft, Radio
..............................
3-19
Appearancecare
...............................
6-48
Appearance Care Materials
.......................
6-55
Arbitration Program
..............................
8-7
Armrest, Storage
...............................
2-51
Ashtrays
.......
..
...................
2-53
Audio Equipment. Adding
. .
......
3-21
Audio Systems
...........
...........
3-6
Auto-Down Window
...
......
2-34
Automatic
DoorLocks
...................................
2-5
Overdrive
...................................
2-23
Starting Your Engine
..........................
2-16
Transaxle
...................................
2-16
Transaxle Check
..................
........
7-42
Transaxle Fluid
...............................
6-19
Transaxle Park Mechanism Check
................
7-44
Automatic Transaxle Operation
....................
2-21
Shifting
.....................................
2-21
Backing up with a Trailer
.....................
4-40
Battery
.....................................
6-35
Charging System Indicator Light
.
.
..........
2-62
Jump Starting
.................................
5-3
Replacement. Remote Lock Control
...............
2-9
Saver
......................................
2-48
Warnings
....................................
5-3
BBB Auto Line
.................................
8-7
Better Business Bureau Mediation
...................
8-7
Blizzard
......................................
4-28
9-1
Brake
Adjustment
..................................
6-34
Fluid
.......................................
6-30
Master Cylinder
..............................
6-30
Parking
.....................................
2-28
PedalTravel
.................................
6-34
Replacing System Parts
........................
6-34
System Warning Light
....................
2-62. 6.31
Trailer
......................................
4-39
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check
..................
7-43
Wear
.......................................
6-33
Brake System Warning Light
.................
2.62. 6.31
Brakes. Anti-Lock
...............................
4-7
Bralung
in
Emergencies
..........................
4-1
1
Break.In. New Vehicle
..........................
2- I3
Brightness Control
..............................
2-46
BTSICheck
...................................
7-43
Bulb Replacement
..............................
6-35
Braking
........................................
4-6
Canadian Roadside Assistance
....................
8-6
Capacities and Specifications
......................
6-62
Carbon Monoxide
..........
2.10.2.32.2.33.4.29. 4.38
Cassette Deck Service
...........................
7-41
Cassette Tape Player
........................
3.9. 3. 13
Cassette Tape Player Care
........................
3-22
Cassette Tape Player Errors
..................
3- 11. 3.15
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature
.................
3-
19
Center Console Cupholder
........................
2-5
1
Center Console Storage Area
......................
2-5
I
Center Rear Passenger Position
....................
1-32
Certification Label
..............................
4-33
Chains. Safety
.................................
4-39
Chains. Tire
...................................
6-47
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
.............................
5-22
Check Engine Light
.............................
2-66
Check Gages Light
..............................
2-71
CheckOilLight
................................
2-70
Checking Your Restraint Systems
..................
1-47
Chemical Paint Spotting
..........................
6-54
Child Restraints
................................
1-36
Securing
in
a
Rear Outside Seat Position
...........
1-37
Securing
in
the Center Rear Seat Position
..........
1-39
Securing
in
the Passenger Seat Position
...........
1-41
Securing
in
the Right Front Seat Position
..........
1-41
WheretoPut
................................
1-36
Cigarette Lighter
...............................
2-53
Circuit Breakers and Fuses
.......................
6-57
Cleaner. Air
...................................
6-18
Cleaning
Alumlnum Wheels
............................
6-53
Fabric
......................................
6-49
Glass
.......................................
6-51
Inside of Your Oldsmobile
......................
6-48
Instrument Panel
.............................
6-50
Leather
.....................................
6-50
Outside of Your Oldsmobile
....................
6-52
Special Problems
.............................
6-49
Stains
......................................
6-49
Tires
.......................................
6-53
Vinyl
.......................................
6-50
Wheels
.....................................
6-53
Windshield
and
Wiper Blades
...................
6-51
Climate Control System
...........................
3-2
TopStrap
...................................
1-37
9-2
Clock. Setting the
................................
3-6
Clutch Fluid. Hydraulic
..........................
6-23
Compact Disc Care
.............................
3-23
Compact Disc Player
............................
3-13
Compact Spare Tire
.............................
5-32
Clutch. Hydraulic
...............................
6-23
Comfort Controls
................................
3-2
Control
of
a
Vehicle
..............................
4-6
Convenience Net
...............................
2-52
Convex Outside Mirror
..........................
2-50
Coolant
Heater. Engine
...............................
2-
19
SurgeTank
..................................
5-16
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
.......................
6-28
Cooling System
................................
5- 15
Courtesy Transportation
...........................
8-6
Cruise Control
.................................
2-39
CruiseLight
...................................
2-71
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
.........
8-4
Customer Assistance Information
...................
8-
1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
....................
8-2
Damage. Finish
...............................
6-54
Damage. Sheet Metal
............................
6-54
Daytime Running Lamps
.........................
2-44
Defects. Reporting Safety
.........................
8-8
DeadBattery
...................................
5-3
Defensive Driving
...............................
4-2
Defogger. Rear Window
..........................
3-5
Defogging
.....................................
3-4
Defrosting
.....................................
3-4
Dimensions. Vehicle
............................
6-63
Dolby@
€3
Noise Reduction
.......................
3-12
DoorLocks
.....................................
2-4
Driver Position
.................................
1-13
Driving
City
........................................
4-21
Defensive
....................................
4-2
Drunken
.....................................
4-3
Freeway
....................................
4-22
In a Blizzard
.................................
4-28
In Foreign Countries
...........................
6-4
In the Rain
..................................
4-18
Night
......................................
4-16
On Curves
..................................
4-11
On Grades While Towing a Trailer
...............
4-40
On Hill and Mountain Roads
....................
4-24
OnSnowandIce
.............................
4-27
WetRoads
..................................
4-18
Winter
......................................
4-26
With a Trailer
................................
4-39
Drunken Driving
................................
4-3
Through Water
...............................
4-20
Easy Entry Seat
................................
1-6
Electrical Equipment. Adding
......
2.17.2.18. 3.21. 6-56
Electrical System
...............................
6-56
Engine
..................................
6.10.
6.11
Coolant
.....................................
6-24
Coolant Heater
...............................
2- 19
Coolant Level Check
..........................
7-41
Coolant Temperature Gage
.....................
2-65
Exhaust
.................
2.10.2.32.2.33.4.29. 4.38
FuseBlock
..................................
6-60
Identification
................................
6-56
OilLevelCheck
..............................
7-41
Running While Parked
.........................
2-33
Specifications
................................
6-62
Starting Your
......................
2.16.247. 2.18
Engineoil
....................................
6-12
Adding
.....................................
6-14
Additives
...................................
6- 17
Checking
...................................
6-13
Pressure Warning Light
........................
2-69
Used
.......................................
6-17
Whentochange
..............................
6-17
Enhanced Traction System Active Light
.........
2.65. 4.9
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
......
2.64. 4.10
Ethanol
........................................
6-4
Exhaust. Engine
............
2.10.2.32.2.33.4.29. 4.38
Overheating
.................................
5-13
Warning Light
............................
2-
.
4.9
Fabric Cleaning
...............................
6-49
Fifth Gear. Manual Transaxle
.....................
2-26
FillingYourTank
................................
6-5
Filter. Air
.....................................
6-18
Finish Care
....................................
6-52
Finish Damage
.................................
6-54
First Gear. Automatic Transaxle
...................
2-24
First Gear. Manual Transaxle
......................
2-25
Flashers. Hazard Warning
.........................
5-2
Flat Tire. Changing
.............................
5-22
Fluids and Lubricants
............................
7-47
FogLamps
....................................
2-45
Foreign Countries. Fuel
...........................
6-4
Fourth
Gear. Manual Transaxle
....................
2-26
Four-Way Manual Seat
...........................
1-3
French Language Manual
11
FrontTowing
..................................
5-10
Fuel
..........................................
6-3
Filling Your Tank
..............................
6-5
Gage
.......................................
2-72
In Foreign Countries
...........................
6-4
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
.......................
6-57
..
...........................
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature
....................
2-65
Fuel
.......................................
2-72
Speedometer
.................................
2-59
Tachometer
..................................
2-60
GarmentHook
.................................
2-54
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle
................
2-21
Gear Positions. Manual Transaxle
..................
2-25
GloveBox
....................................
2-50
Gross Axle Weight Rating
........................
4-33
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
......................
4-33
GAWR
.......................................
4-33
9-4
Guide en FranGais
11
GVWR
.......................................
4-33
..
.................................
Halogen Bulbs
................................
6-35
Hazard Warning Flashers
..........................
5-2
Head Restraints
.................................
1-5
Headlamps
....................................
2-44
Bulb Replacement
............................
6-35
HighLow Beam Changer
......................
2-37
OnReminder
................................
2-44
Wiring
.....................................
6-57
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance
..............
8-4
Heating
........................................
3-4
High-Beam Headlamps
..........................
2-37
Highway Hypnosis
..............................
4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads
.........................
4-24
Hitches. Trailer
.................................
4-38
Hood
Checking Things Under
.........................
6-8
Release
......................................
6-9
Horn
.........................................
2-34
Hydraulic Clutch
...............................
6-23
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
...........................
6-23
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
...................
7-42
Hydroplaning
..................................
4-20
If
a Tire Goes Flat
..............................
5-21
Ignition Positions
...............................
2- 14
Illuminated EntryExit System
.....................
2-46
Inflation. Tire
..................................
6-41
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
.................
2-49
Inspections
Brakesystem
................................
7-46
Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance
...................
7-46
Exhaust Systems
.............................
7-45
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot
..................
7-45
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal
...................
7-45
Radiator and Heater Hose
......................
7-45
Steering
....................................
7-45
Suspension
..................................
7-45
Throttle Linkage
..............................
7-45
Instrumentpanel
...............................
2-56
Brightness Control
............................
2-46
Cleaning
....................................
6-50
Cluster
.....................................
2-58
FuseBlock
..................................
6-58
Interior Lamps
.................................
2-46
Jack. Tire
....................................
5-24
Jump Starting
...................................
5-3
Key Lock Cylinders Service
.....................
7-42
Key Release Button
.............................
2-16
Keys
..........................................
2-2
Labels
Certification
.................................
4-33
Service Parts Identification
.....................
6-56
Tire-Loading Information
......................
4-33
Vehicle Identification Number
...................
6-56
Lamps
........................................
2-43
Interior
.....................................
2-46
OnReminder
................................
2-44
Exterior
....................................
2-43
Fog
........................................
2-45
9-5
.
Latches. Seatback
................................
1-6
Leaving Your Vehicle
.............................
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running
.......
2-30
Lighter
.......................................
2-53
Lights
Air Bag Readiness
.......................
1.22. 2.6
1
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
............
2.63. 4.7
Brake System Warning
....................
2.62. 6.31
Charging System Indicator
......................
2-62
Check Engine
................................
2-66
CheckOil
...................................
2-70
Cruise
......................................
2-71
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
...............
2-69
Enhanced Traction System Active Light
.......
2.65. 4-9
ETS
Warning
..........................
2- 64. 4. 10
Interior
.....................................
2-46
Low Coolant Warning
.........................
2-66
Low Washer
.................................
2-71
Passlock Warning
.............................
2-70
Safety Belt Reminder
......................
1.8.
2.61
Loading Your Vehicle
...........................
4-33
Lock-Out Switch
...............................
2-34
Automatic Door
...............................
2-5
Cylinders
...................................
7-42
Door
........................................
2-4
Key Lock Cylinder Service
.....................
7-42
PowerDoor
..................................
2-5
Rear Door Security
.............................
2-6
Steering Column Lock Check
...................
7-44
Trunk
......................................
2-10
CheckGages
................................
2-71
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
....
2.64. 4.10
Upshift
....................................
2-71
Locks
.........................................
2-4
Low Coolant Warning Light
......................
2-66
Low Washer Light
..............................
2-71
Lubricants and Fluids
............................
7-47
Lubrication Service. Body
........................
7-42
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts
...........
6-63
Maintenance Record
............................
7-49
Maintenance Schedule
............................
7-1
Introduction
..................................
7-2
Long Tripmighway Definition
...................
7-6
Long Tripmighway Intervals
.....................
7-6
Organization
..................................
7-3
Owner Checks and Services
.....................
7-41
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
................
7-45
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
.............
7-47
Scheduled Maintenance Services
..................
7-4
Short
Trip/City Definition
.......................
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals
........................
7-5
Maintenance. Underbody
.........................
6-54
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
.................
4-41
Making Turns
with
a Trailer
......................
4-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
......................
2-66
Manual Front Seat
...............................
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support
..........................
1-3
Manual Remote Control Mirror
....................
2-49
ManualTransaxle
...............................
2-16
Shifting
.....................................
2-25
Starting Your Engine
..........................
2-16
Manual Transaxle Check
.........................
7-42
Manual Transaxle Fluid
..........................
6-22
Methanol
......................................
6-4
Mirrors
.......................................
2-49
Convex Outside
..............................
2-50
Inside Day/Night Rearview
.....................
2-49
Manual Remote Control
........................
2-49
Power Remote Control
.........................
2-50
Visorvanity
.................................
2-54
MountainRoads
................................
4-24
Multifunction Lever
.............................
2-35
Net. Convenience
..............................
2-52
Neutral. Automatic Transaxle
.....................
2-22
Neutral. Manual Transaxle
........................
2-26
New Vehicle “Break-In”
.........................
2- 13
Nightvision
...................................
4-17
Odometer
....................................
2-59
Off-Road Recovery
.............................
4-
13
Oil. Engine
....................................
6-12
Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle
...................
2-23
Overheating Engine
.............................
5- 13
Owner Checks and Services
.......................
7-41
Owner Publications. Ordering
.....................
8-
IO
Paint Spotting. Chemical
........................
6-54
Park
Automatic Transaxle
..........................
2-2
1
Shifting Into
.................................
2-29
Shifting Out of
...............................
2-31
AtNight
....................................
2-12
Brake
......................................
2-28
Brake Mechanism Check
.......................
7-44
Parking
Lots
.......................................
2-12
Over Things That Burn
........................
2-32
With a Trailer
................................
4-41
Your Vehicle. Manual Transaxle
.................
2-31
Passenger Position
..............................
1-21
Passing
.......................................
4-13
Passing with a Trailer
............................
4-39
Passlock Warning Light
..........................
2-70
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
..................
7-45
Power
Accessory Outlet
.............................
2-54
DoorLocks
...................................
2-5
Option Fuses
................................
6-57
Remote Control Mirror
........................
2-50
Seat
.........................................
1-4
Steering
....................................
4-11
Steering Fluid
................................
6-28
Windows
...................................
2-34
Pregnancy. Use
of
Safety Belts
....................
1-20
Problems on the Road
............................
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner
...................
8-10
Radio Reception
..............................
3-21
Radios
........................................
3-6
Rain. Driving In
................................
4-18
Reading Lamps
...........................
2-47. 2-48
Rear
Door Security Locks
...........................
2-6
.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
.....................
1-30
Seat Passengers
..............................
1-27
Window Defogger
.............................
3-5
Outside Seat Position
..........................
1-27
Towing
.....................................
5-11
~~
9-7
..
Rear Seat Cupholder
............................
2-52
Rear Window Defogger Antenna
...................
3-23
Rearview Mirror
................................
2-49
Inside Daymight
.............................
2-49
Outside. Manual
..............................
2-50
Outside. Power
...............................
2-50
Reclining Front Seatbacks
.........................
1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing
......................
4-30
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning
....................
6-62
Remote
Fuel
Door Release
.............................
6-6
Lock Control
.................................
2-7
Trunk Release Lockout
........................
2- 11
Remote Lock Control
.............................
2-7
Remote Trunk Release
...........................
2-1
1
Replacement
Bulbs
......................................
6-61
Parts
.......................................
6-63
Wheel
......................................
6-46
Replacing Safety Belts
...........................
1-47
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................
8-8
Restraints
Checking
...................................
1-47
Child
.......................................
1-36
Head
........................................
1-5
Replacing Parts After
a
Crash
...................
1-47
Systemcheck
................................
7-42
Reverse. Automatic Transaxle
.....................
2-22
Reverse. Manual Transaxle
.......................
2-26
Right Front Passenger Position
....................
1-2
I
Roadside Assistance
..............................
8-5
Roadside Assistance. Canadian
.....................
8-6
Rocking Your Vehicle
...........................
5-33
Rotation. Tires
.................................
6-42
Safety Belt Extender
............................
1-47
Safety Belts
....................................
1-7
.
Adults
......................................
1-13
Care
.......................................
6-51
Center Rear Passenger Position
..................
1-32
Children
....................................
1-34
Driver Position
...............................
1
.
13
Extender
....................................
1-47
How to Wear Properly
.........................
1
.
13
Incorrect Usage
.....
1.16. 1.17. 1.18. 1.19. 1.45. 1-46
LapBelt
....................................
1-33
Lap-Shoulder
...........................
1.13. 1-27
Larger Children
..............................
1-44
Passenger Position
............................
1-21
Questions and Answers
........................
1
.
12
Rear Comfort Guides
..........................
1-30
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
............
1-27
Rear Seat Passengers
..........................
1-27
Reminder Light
..........................
1.8. 2.61
Replacing After
a
Crash
........................
1-47
Right Front Passenger Position
..................
1-21
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
...................
1-15
Smaller Children and Babies
....................
1-34
Use During Pregnancy
.........................
1-20
WhyTheyWork
...............................
1-9
Safety Chains
..................................
4-39
Safety Defects. Reporting
.........................
8-8
Safety Warnings and Symbols
.......................
111
Scheduled Maintenance Services
....................
7-4
Seatback
Latches
......................................
1-6
Reclining Front
...............................
1-4
...
Seats
EasyEntry
...................................
1-6
Folding the Rear
...............................
1-7
Four-Way Manual
.............................
1-3
ManualFront
.................................
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support
........................
1-3
Power
.......................................
1-4
Rear
........................................
1-7
Restraint Systems
..............................
1
.
1
Seat Controls
.................................
1-2
Securing
a
Child Restraint
......................
1-37
Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle
.................
2-23
Second Gear. Manual Transaxle
...................
2-26
Service
........................................
6-2
Bulletins. Ordering
............................
8-
10
Manuals. Ordering
............................
8-
10
Parts Identification Label
.......................
6-56
Publications. Ordering
.........................
8-
10
Work. Doing Your Own
.........................
6-2
Service and Appearance Care
......................
6-
1
Service and Owner Publications
...................
8-
10
Service Publications
.............................
8-
10
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Oldsmobile
........
1-26
Sheet Metal Damage
............................
6-54
Shift Lever. Automatic Transaxle
..................
2-21
Shift Light
....................................
2-27
Shiftspeeds
...................................
2-27
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle
..........................
2-22
Into Park
(P)
.................................
2-29
Manual Transaxle
.............................
2-25
Out of
Park
..................................
2-31
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
.....................
1
-
15
Signaling Turns
................................
2-36
Skidding
......................................
4-15
Sound Equipment, Adding
........................
3-21
Spare Tire, Compact
.............................
5-32
Specifications and Capacities
......................
6-62
Specifications. Engine
...........................
6-62
Speedometer
...................................
2-59
SRS
.........................................
1-21
Stains, Cleaning
................................
6-50
Starter Switch Check
............................
7-43
Starting Your Engine
..................
2- 16.2-17, 2- 18
Steam
........................................
5-13
Steering
......................................
4-11
Column Lock Check
..........................
7-44
In Emergencies
...............................
4-12
Power
......................................
4-11
Tips
........................................
4-11
Wheel. Tilt
..................................
2-35
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance
...............
8-4
Storage Compartments
...........................
2-51
Storage, Vehicle
................................
6-35
Stuck:
In
Sand, Mud. Ice or Snow
..................
5-33
Sunvisors
....................................
2-54
Sunglasses Storage
..............................
2-52
Sunroof
.......................................
2-55
Supplemental Restraint System
....................
1-21
Surge Tank, Coolant
.............................
5-16
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
.........................
6-28
Symbols, Vehicle
..................................
v
Tachometer
..................................
2-60
Taillamp Bulb Replacement
.......................
6-38
Tape Player Care
...............................
3-22
Theft
.........................................
2-12
...
.
0-9
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player
................
3- 19
Thermostat
....................................
6-28
Third Gear. Automatic Transaxle
...................
2-23
Third Gear. Manual Transaxle
.....................
2-26
Tilt Steering Wheel
.............................
2-35
Time. Setting the
................................
3-6
Tire Chains
....................................
6-47
Tire Loading
...................................
4-33
Tire-Loading Information Label
...................
4-33
Tires
.........................................
6-40
Alignment and Balance
........................
6-45
BuyingNew
.................................
6-44
Chains
.....................................
6-47
ChangingaFlat
..............................
5-22
Cleaning
....................................
6-53
Compact Spare
...............................
5-32
Inflation
....................................
6-41
Inflation Check
...............................
7-41
Inspection and Rotation
........................
6-42
Loading
....................................
4-33
Pressure
....................................
6-41
Temperature
.................................
6-46
Traction
....................................
6-45
Treadwear
...................................
6-45
Uniform Quality Grading
.......................
6-45
Used Replacement Wheel
......................
6-47
Wear Indicators
..............................
6-43
Wheel Replacement
...........................
6-46
When It’s Time for New
.......................
6-43
THEFTLOCK
TM
................................
3- 19
TopStrap
.....................................
1-37
TorqueLock
...................................
2-30
Torque. Wheel
Nut
.........................
5-29. 6-62
Towing
FromtheFront
...............................
4-30
From the Rear
...............................
4-31
Recreational Vehicle
..........................
4-32
Towing
a
Trailer
................................
4-35
Towing Your Vehicle
.............................
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle From the Front
Automatic Transaxle
..........................
4-30
Manual Transaxle
.............................
4-31
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
................
4-32
Trailer
BaclungUp
.................................
4-40
Brakes
.....................................
4-39
Driving on Grades
............................
4-40
Driving
with
.................................
4-39
Following Distance When Driving a
..............
4-39
Hitches
.....................................
4-38
Maintenance When Towing
.....................
4-41
Making Turns with a
..........................
4-40
ParlungonHills
..............................
4-41
Passing with
a
...............................
4-39
Safety Chains
................................
4-39
Tongueweight
...............................
4-37
Total Weight on Tires
..........................
4-38
Towing
.....................................
4-35
Turnsignals
.................................
4-40
Weight
.....................................
4-37
Automatic
...............
2- 16. 2-2 1. 6. 19.7.42. 7.44
Manual
......................
2- 16.2.25.6.22. 7.42
Transmitters. Remote Lock Control
..................
2-7
Transportation. Courtesy
..........................
8-6
TTYUsers
.....................................
8-4
Transaxle
9-10
i
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
...............
2-36
Turn Signal On Chime
...........................
2-36
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
...................
2-35
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
................
4-40
Underbody Flushing Service
.....................
7-44
Underbody Maintenance
.........................
6-54
Up Shift Light
.................................
2-71
Vehicle
Control
......................................
4-6
Damagewarnings
..............................
iv
Dimensions
.................................
6-63
Identification Number
.........................
6-56
Loading
....................................
4-33
Storage
.....................................
6-35
Ventilation System
...............................
3-5
Visor Vanity Mirrors
............................
2-54
Visors. Sun
....................................
2-54
warning Devices
...............................
5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators
...............
2-60
Warranty Information
.............................
8-8
Washer Fluid. Windshield
........................
6-29
Washing Your Vehicle
...........................
6-52
Weatherstrips
..................................
6-51
Nut
Torque
.............................
5.29. 6.62
Replacement
.................................
6-46
Used Replacement
............................
6-47
Wheel
Alignment
..................................
6-46
Wrench
.....................................
5-24
Windows
.....................................
2-34
Auto-Down
.................................
2-34
Lock-Out Switch
.............................
2-34
Power
......................................
2-34
Windshield Washer
.............................
2-38
Fluid
..................................
2.38. 6.29
FluidLevelCheck
............................
7-41
Windshield Wiper
..............................
2-37
Bladecheck
.................................
7-42
Blade Replacement
...........................
6-40
Fuses
......................................
6-57
Winter Driving
.................................
4-26
Wiring. Headlamp
..............................
6-57
WreckerTowing
.................................
5-8
Wrench. Wheel
.................................
5-24
Your Vehicle and the Environment
.................
7-2
9-11
Service
Station
Checkpoints
COOLANT
SURGE
TANK 2.4L
ENGINE
FUEL
SECONDARY
WINDSHIELD FLUID
TIRES
RESERVOIR
BATTERY P6-40
P6-29 P6-35
REMOTE
FUEL DOOR P6-6
TRUNK RELEASE P2-11
For
detailed information, refer to the page
number
listed, or see the
Index
in
the back of the owner's manual.
9-12
